1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2026 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <linux/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flush the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, to report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF: The min chandef changed 217 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP: The AP channel definition changed, so (wider 218 * bandwidth) OFDMA settings need to be changed 219 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING: The punctured channel(s) bitmap 220 * was changed. 221 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA: NPCA configuration changed 222 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA_PUNCT: NPCA puncturing changed 223 */ 224 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 225 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 226 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 227 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 228 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 229 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF = BIT(4), 230 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP = BIT(5), 231 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING = BIT(6), 232 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA = BIT(7), 233 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA_PUNCT = BIT(8), 234 }; 235 236 /** 237 * struct ieee80211_chan_req - A channel "request" 238 * @oper: channel definition to use for operation 239 * @ap: the channel definition of the AP, if any 240 * (otherwise the chan member is %NULL) 241 * @require_npca: If NPCA is configured, require it to 242 * remain, this is used by AP interfaces 243 */ 244 struct ieee80211_chan_req { 245 struct cfg80211_chan_def oper; 246 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 247 bool require_npca; 248 }; 249 250 /** 251 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 252 * 253 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 254 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 255 * 256 * @def: the channel definition 257 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 258 * @ap: the channel definition the AP actually is operating as, 259 * for use with (wider bandwidth) OFDMA 260 * @radio_idx: index of the wiphy radio used used for this channel 261 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 262 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 263 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 264 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 265 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 266 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 267 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 268 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 269 */ 270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 271 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 272 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 273 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 274 275 int radio_idx; 276 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 277 278 bool radar_enabled; 279 280 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 281 }; 282 283 /** 284 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 285 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 286 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 287 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 288 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 289 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 290 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 291 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 292 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 293 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 294 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 295 * for changes/removal.) 296 */ 297 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 298 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 299 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 300 }; 301 302 /** 303 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 304 * 305 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 306 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 307 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 308 * done. 309 * 310 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 311 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 312 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 313 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 314 */ 315 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 316 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 317 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 318 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 319 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 320 }; 321 322 /** 323 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 324 * 325 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 326 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 327 * 328 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 329 * also implies a change in the AID. 330 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 332 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 333 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 334 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 336 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 337 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 339 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 341 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 342 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 343 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 344 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 345 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 346 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 347 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 348 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 349 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 350 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 351 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 352 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 353 * changed 354 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 355 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 356 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 357 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 358 * context had been assigned. 359 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 360 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 361 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 362 * keep alive) changed. 363 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 364 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 365 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 366 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 367 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 368 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 369 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 370 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 371 * status changed. 372 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS: MLD valid links status changed. 373 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM: negotiated TID to link mapping was changed 374 * @BSS_CHANGED_TPE: transmit power envelope changed 375 * @BSS_CHANGED_NAN_LOCAL_SCHED: NAN local schedule changed (NAN mode only) 376 * @BSS_CHANGED_NPCA: NPCA parameters changed 377 */ 378 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 379 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 380 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 381 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 382 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 383 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 384 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 385 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 386 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 387 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 388 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 389 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 390 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 391 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 392 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 393 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 394 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 395 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 396 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 397 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 398 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 399 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 400 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 401 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 402 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 403 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 404 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 405 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 406 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 407 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 408 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 409 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 410 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = BIT_ULL(31), 411 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS = BIT_ULL(33), 412 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM = BIT_ULL(34), 413 BSS_CHANGED_TPE = BIT_ULL(35), 414 BSS_CHANGED_NAN_LOCAL_SCHED = BIT_ULL(36), 415 BSS_CHANGED_NPCA = BIT_ULL(37), 416 417 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 418 }; 419 420 /* 421 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 422 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 423 * filtering will be disabled. 424 */ 425 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 426 427 /** 428 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 429 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 430 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 431 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 432 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 433 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 434 * once each time the timeout triggers. 435 */ 436 enum ieee80211_event_type { 437 RSSI_EVENT, 438 MLME_EVENT, 439 BAR_RX_EVENT, 440 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 441 }; 442 443 /** 444 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 445 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 446 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 447 */ 448 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 449 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 450 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 451 }; 452 453 /** 454 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 455 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 456 */ 457 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 458 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 459 }; 460 461 /** 462 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 463 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 464 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 465 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 466 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 467 */ 468 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 469 AUTH_EVENT, 470 ASSOC_EVENT, 471 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 472 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 473 }; 474 475 /** 476 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 477 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 478 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 479 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 480 */ 481 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 482 MLME_SUCCESS, 483 MLME_DENIED, 484 MLME_TIMEOUT, 485 }; 486 487 /** 488 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 489 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 490 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 491 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 492 */ 493 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 494 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 495 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 496 u16 reason; 497 }; 498 499 /** 500 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 501 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 502 * @tid: the tid 503 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 504 */ 505 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 506 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 507 u16 tid; 508 u16 ssn; 509 }; 510 511 /** 512 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 513 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 514 * @u.rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 515 * @u.mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 516 * @u.ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 517 * @u:union holding the fields above 518 */ 519 struct ieee80211_event { 520 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 521 union { 522 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 523 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 524 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 525 } u; 526 }; 527 528 /** 529 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 530 * 531 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 532 * 533 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 534 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 535 */ 536 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 537 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 538 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 539 }; 540 541 /** 542 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 543 * 544 * @lci: LCI subelement content 545 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 546 * @lci_len: LCI data length 547 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 548 */ 549 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 550 const u8 *lci; 551 const u8 *civicloc; 552 size_t lci_len; 553 size_t civicloc_len; 554 }; 555 556 /** 557 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 558 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 559 * 560 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 561 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 562 */ 563 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 564 u32 min_interval; 565 u32 max_interval; 566 }; 567 568 #define IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ 5 569 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp { 570 bool valid; 571 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 572 u8 count; 573 }; 574 575 #define IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ 16 576 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd { 577 bool valid; 578 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 579 u8 count, n; 580 }; 581 582 /** 583 * struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe - parsed transmit power envelope information 584 * @max_local: maximum local EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz each 585 * (indexed by TX power category) 586 * @max_reg_client: maximum regulatory client EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 587 * 160, 320 MHz each 588 * (indexed by TX power category) 589 * @psd_local: maximum local power spectral density, one value for each 20 MHz 590 * subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 591 * (indexed by TX power category) 592 * @psd_reg_client: maximum regulatory power spectral density, one value for 593 * each 20 MHz subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 594 * (indexed by TX power category) 595 */ 596 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe { 597 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp max_local[2], max_reg_client[2]; 598 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd psd_local[2], psd_reg_client[2]; 599 }; 600 601 /** 602 * struct ieee80211_bss_npca_params - NPCA parameters 603 * @min_dur_thresh: NPCA minimum duration threshold (512 + 128*n usec) 604 * @switch_delay: NPCA switch delay (units of 4 usec) 605 * @switch_back_delay: NPCA switch back delay (units of 4 usec) 606 * @init_qsrc: initial QSRC value 607 * @moplen: indicates MOPLEN NPCA is permitted in the BSS 608 * @enabled: NPCA is enabled for this link 609 * 610 * Note: the individual values (except @enabled) are in spec representation. 611 */ 612 struct ieee80211_bss_npca_params { 613 u32 min_dur_thresh:4, 614 switch_delay:6, 615 switch_back_delay:6, 616 init_qsrc:2, 617 moplen:1, 618 enabled:1; 619 }; 620 621 /** 622 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 623 * 624 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 625 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 626 * 627 * @vif: reference to owning VIF 628 * @bss: the cfg80211 bss descriptor. Valid only for a station, and only 629 * when associated. Note: This contains information which is not 630 * necessarily authenticated. For example, information coming from probe 631 * responses. 632 * @addr: (link) address used locally 633 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 634 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 635 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 636 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 637 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 638 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 639 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 640 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 641 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 642 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 643 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 644 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 645 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 646 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 647 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 648 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 649 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 650 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 651 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 652 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 653 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 654 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 655 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 656 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 657 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 658 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 659 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 660 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 661 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 662 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 663 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 664 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 665 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 666 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 667 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 668 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 669 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 670 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 671 * the current band. 672 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 673 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 674 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 675 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 676 * @chanreq: Channel request for this BSS -- the hardware might be 677 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 678 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 679 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 680 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 681 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 682 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 683 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 684 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 685 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 686 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 687 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 688 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 689 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 690 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 691 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 692 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 693 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 694 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 695 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 696 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 697 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 698 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 699 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 700 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 701 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 702 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 703 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 704 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 705 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 706 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 707 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 708 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 709 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 710 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 711 * station. 712 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 713 * responder functionality. 714 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 715 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 716 * @tx_bss_conf: Pointer to the BSS configuration of transmitting interface 717 * if MBSSID is enabled. This pointer is RCU-protected due to CSA finish 718 * and BSS color change flows accessing it. 719 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 720 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 721 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 722 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 723 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 724 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 725 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 726 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 727 * connected to (STA) 728 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 729 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 730 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 731 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 732 * interval. 733 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 734 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 735 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 736 * @tpe: transmit power envelope information 737 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 738 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 739 * @epcs_support: does this BSS support EPCS 740 * @uhr_support: does this BSS support UHR 741 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. 742 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 743 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 744 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 745 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 746 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 747 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 748 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. 749 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 750 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability. 751 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability. 752 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability. 753 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 754 * beamformer 755 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 756 * beamformee 757 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 758 * beamformer 759 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 760 * beamformee 761 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 762 * beamformer 763 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 764 * beamformee 765 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU 766 * beamformer 767 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission 768 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 769 * bandwidth 770 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 771 * beamformer 772 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 773 * beamformee 774 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU 775 * beamformer 776 * @eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo: in AP-mode, does this BSS support the 777 * reception of an EHT TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 778 * bandwidth 779 * @eht_disable_mcs15: disable EHT-MCS 15 reception capability. 780 * @bss_param_ch_cnt: in BSS-mode, the BSS params change count. This 781 * information is the latest known value. It can come from this link's 782 * beacon or from a beacon sent by another link. 783 * @bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id: in BSS-mode, the link_id to which the beacon 784 * that updated &bss_param_ch_cnt belongs. E.g. if link 1 doesn't hear 785 * its beacons, and link 2 sent a beacon with an RNR element that updated 786 * link 1's BSS params change count, then, link 1's 787 * bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will be 2. That means that link 1 knows that 788 * link 2 was the link that updated its bss_param_ch_cnt value. 789 * In case link 1 hears its beacon again, bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will 790 * be updated to 1, even if bss_param_ch_cnt didn't change. This allows 791 * the link to know that it heard the latest value from its own beacon 792 * (as opposed to hearing its value from another link's beacon). 793 * @s1g_long_beacon_period: number of beacon intervals between each long 794 * beacon transmission. 795 * @npca: NPCA parameters 796 */ 797 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 798 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 799 struct cfg80211_bss *bss; 800 801 const u8 *bssid; 802 unsigned int link_id; 803 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 804 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 805 bool uora_exists; 806 u8 uora_ocw_range; 807 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 808 bool he_support; 809 bool twt_requester; 810 bool twt_responder; 811 bool twt_protected; 812 bool twt_broadcast; 813 /* erp related data */ 814 bool use_cts_prot; 815 bool use_short_preamble; 816 bool use_short_slot; 817 bool enable_beacon; 818 u8 dtim_period; 819 u16 beacon_int; 820 u16 assoc_capability; 821 u64 sync_tsf; 822 u32 sync_device_ts; 823 u8 sync_dtim_count; 824 u32 basic_rates; 825 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 826 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 827 u16 ht_operation_mode; 828 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 829 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 830 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 831 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 832 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq; 833 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 834 bool qos; 835 bool hidden_ssid; 836 int txpower; 837 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 838 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 839 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 840 u16 max_idle_period; 841 bool protected_keep_alive; 842 bool ftm_responder; 843 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 844 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 845 bool nontransmitted; 846 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *tx_bss_conf; 847 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 848 u8 bssid_index; 849 u8 bssid_indicator; 850 bool ema_ap; 851 u8 profile_periodicity; 852 struct { 853 u32 params; 854 u16 nss_set; 855 } he_oper; 856 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 857 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 858 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 859 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 860 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 861 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 862 863 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe tpe; 864 865 u8 pwr_reduction; 866 bool eht_support; 867 bool epcs_support; 868 bool uhr_support; 869 870 bool csa_active; 871 872 bool mu_mimo_owner; 873 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 874 875 bool color_change_active; 876 u8 color_change_color; 877 878 bool ht_ldpc; 879 bool vht_ldpc; 880 bool he_ldpc; 881 bool vht_su_beamformer; 882 bool vht_su_beamformee; 883 bool vht_mu_beamformer; 884 bool vht_mu_beamformee; 885 bool he_su_beamformer; 886 bool he_su_beamformee; 887 bool he_mu_beamformer; 888 bool he_full_ul_mumimo; 889 bool eht_su_beamformer; 890 bool eht_su_beamformee; 891 bool eht_mu_beamformer; 892 bool eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo; 893 bool eht_disable_mcs15; 894 895 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt; 896 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id; 897 898 u8 s1g_long_beacon_period; 899 900 struct ieee80211_bss_npca_params npca; 901 }; 902 903 #define IEEE80211_NAN_MAX_CHANNELS 3 904 905 /** 906 * struct ieee80211_nan_channel - NAN channel information 907 * 908 * @chanreq: channel request for this NAN channel. Even though this chanreq::ap 909 * is irrelevant for NAN, still store it for convenience - some functions 910 * require it as an argument. 911 * @needed_rx_chains: number of RX chains needed for this NAN channel 912 * @chanctx_conf: chanctx_conf assigned to this NAN channel. 913 * If a local channel is being ULWed (because we needed this chanctx for 914 * something else), the local NAN channel that used this chanctx, 915 * will have this pointer set to %NULL. 916 * A peer NAN channel should never have this pointer set to %NULL. 917 * @channel_entry: the Channel Entry blob as defined in Wi-Fi Aware 918 * (TM) 4.0 specification Table 100 (Channel Entry format for the NAN 919 * Availability attribute). 920 */ 921 struct ieee80211_nan_channel { 922 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq; 923 u8 needed_rx_chains; 924 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf; 925 u8 channel_entry[6]; 926 }; 927 928 /** 929 * struct ieee80211_nan_peer_map - NAN peer schedule map 930 * 931 * This stores a single map from a peer's schedule. Each peer can have 932 * multiple maps. 933 * 934 * @map_id: the map ID from the peer schedule, %CFG80211_NAN_INVALID_MAP_ID 935 * if unused 936 * @slots: mapping of time slots to channel configurations in the schedule's 937 * channels array 938 */ 939 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_map { 940 u8 map_id; 941 struct ieee80211_nan_channel *slots[CFG80211_NAN_SCHED_NUM_TIME_SLOTS]; 942 }; 943 944 /** 945 * struct ieee80211_nan_peer_sched - NAN peer schedule 946 * 947 * This stores the complete schedule from a peer. Contains peer-level 948 * parameters and an array of schedule maps. 949 * 950 * @seq_id: the sequence ID from the peer schedule 951 * @committed_dw: committed DW as published by the peer 952 * @max_chan_switch: maximum channel switch time in microseconds 953 * @init_ulw: initial ULWs as published by the peer (copied) 954 * @ulw_size: number of bytes in @init_ulw 955 * @maps: array of peer schedule maps. Invalid slots have map_id set to 956 * %CFG80211_NAN_INVALID_MAP_ID. 957 * @n_channels: number of valid channel entries in @channels 958 * @channels: flexible array of negotiated peer channels for this schedule 959 */ 960 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_sched { 961 u8 seq_id; 962 u16 committed_dw; 963 u16 max_chan_switch; 964 const u8 *init_ulw; 965 u16 ulw_size; 966 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_map maps[CFG80211_NAN_MAX_PEER_MAPS]; 967 u8 n_channels; 968 struct ieee80211_nan_channel channels[] __counted_by(n_channels); 969 }; 970 971 /** 972 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 973 * 974 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 975 * 976 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 977 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 978 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 979 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 980 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 981 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 982 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 983 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 984 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 985 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 986 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 987 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 988 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 989 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 990 * station 991 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 992 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 993 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 994 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 995 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 996 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 997 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 998 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 999 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 1000 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 1001 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 1002 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 1003 * hardware queue. 1004 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 1005 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 1006 * is for the whole aggregation. 1007 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 1008 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 1009 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 1010 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 1011 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 1012 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 1013 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 1014 * off-channel operation. 1015 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 1016 * (header conversion) 1017 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 1018 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 1019 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 1020 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 1021 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 1022 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 1023 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 1024 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 1025 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 1026 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 1027 * queue gets full. 1028 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 1029 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 1030 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 1031 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 1032 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 1033 * should kick the MLME state machine. 1034 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 1035 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 1036 * status to user space) 1037 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 1038 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 1039 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 1040 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 1041 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 1042 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 1043 * handled properly by the device. 1044 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 1045 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 1046 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 1047 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 1048 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 1049 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 1050 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 1051 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 1052 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 1053 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 1054 * PS-Poll responses. 1055 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 1056 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 1057 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 1058 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 1059 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 1060 * monitor injection). 1061 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 1062 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 1063 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 1064 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 1065 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 1066 * 1067 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 1068 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 1069 */ 1070 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 1071 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 1072 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 1073 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 1074 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 1075 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 1076 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 1077 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 1078 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 1079 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 1080 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 1081 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 1082 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 1083 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 1084 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 1085 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 1086 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 1087 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 1088 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 1089 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 1090 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 1091 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 1092 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 1093 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 1094 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 1095 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 1096 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 1097 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 1098 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 1099 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 1100 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 1101 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 1102 }; 1103 1104 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 1105 1106 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 1107 1108 /** 1109 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 1110 * 1111 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 1112 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 1113 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 1114 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 1115 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 1116 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 1117 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 1118 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 1119 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 1120 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 1121 * it can be sent out. 1122 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 1123 * has already been assigned to this frame. 1124 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 1125 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 1126 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 1127 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 1128 * for sequence number assignment 1129 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK: Don't use rate mask for this frame 1130 * which is transmitted due to scanning or offchannel TX, not in normal 1131 * operation on the interface. 1132 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 1133 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 1134 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 1135 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 1136 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 1137 * it's intended for an MLD. 1138 * 1139 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 1140 */ 1141 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 1142 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 1143 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 1144 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 1145 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 1146 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 1147 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 1148 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 1149 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 1150 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 1151 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 1152 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK = BIT(10), 1153 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 1154 }; 1155 1156 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 1157 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 1158 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 1159 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 1160 1161 /** 1162 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 1163 * 1164 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 1165 * 1166 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 1167 */ 1168 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 1169 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 1170 }; 1171 1172 /* 1173 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 1174 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 1175 */ 1176 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 1177 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 1178 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 1179 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 1180 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 1181 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 1182 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 1183 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 1184 1185 /** 1186 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 1187 * Rate Control algorithm. 1188 * 1189 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 1190 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 1191 * 1192 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 1193 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 1194 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 1195 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 1196 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 1197 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 1198 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 1199 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 1200 * Greenfield mode. 1201 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 1202 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 1203 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 1204 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 1205 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 1206 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 1207 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 1208 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 1209 */ 1210 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 1211 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 1212 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 1213 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 1214 1215 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 1216 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 1217 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 1218 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 1219 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 1220 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 1221 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 1222 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 1223 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 1224 }; 1225 1226 1227 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 1228 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 1229 1230 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 1231 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 1232 1233 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 1234 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 1235 1236 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 1237 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 1238 1239 /** 1240 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 1241 * 1242 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 1243 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1244 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1245 * 1246 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1247 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1248 * 1249 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1250 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1251 * 1252 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1253 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1254 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1255 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1256 * information:: 1257 * 1258 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1259 * 1260 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1261 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1262 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1263 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1264 * information should then contain:: 1265 * 1266 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1267 * 1268 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1269 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1270 */ 1271 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1272 s8 idx; 1273 u16 count:5, 1274 flags:11; 1275 } __packed; 1276 1277 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1278 1279 static inline bool ieee80211_rate_valid(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1280 { 1281 return rate->idx >= 0 && rate->count > 0; 1282 } 1283 1284 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1285 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1286 { 1287 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1288 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1289 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1290 } 1291 1292 static inline u8 1293 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1294 { 1295 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1296 } 1297 1298 static inline u8 1299 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1300 { 1301 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1302 } 1303 1304 /** 1305 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1306 * 1307 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1308 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1309 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1310 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1311 * 1312 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1313 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1314 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1315 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1316 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1317 * @status_data: internal data for TX status handling, assigned privately, 1318 * see also &enum ieee80211_status_data for the internal documentation 1319 * @status_data_idr: indicates status data is IDR allocated ID for ack frame 1320 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1321 * @control: union part for control data 1322 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1323 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1324 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1325 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1326 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1327 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1328 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1329 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1330 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1331 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1332 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1333 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1334 * @pad: padding 1335 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1336 * @status: union part for status data 1337 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1338 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1339 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1340 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1341 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1342 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1343 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1344 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1345 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1346 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1347 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1348 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1349 */ 1350 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1351 /* common information */ 1352 u32 flags; 1353 u32 band:3, 1354 status_data_idr:1, 1355 status_data:13, 1356 hw_queue:4, 1357 tx_time_est:10; 1358 /* 1 free bit */ 1359 1360 union { 1361 struct { 1362 union { 1363 /* rate control */ 1364 struct { 1365 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1366 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1367 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1368 u8 use_rts:1; 1369 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1370 u8 short_preamble:1; 1371 u8 skip_table:1; 1372 1373 /* for injection only (bitmap) */ 1374 u8 antennas:2; 1375 1376 /* 14 bits free */ 1377 }; 1378 /* only needed before rate control */ 1379 unsigned long jiffies; 1380 }; 1381 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1382 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1383 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1384 u32 flags; 1385 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1386 } control; 1387 struct { 1388 u64 cookie; 1389 } ack; 1390 struct { 1391 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1392 s32 ack_signal; 1393 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1394 u8 ampdu_len; 1395 u8 antenna; 1396 u8 pad; 1397 u16 tx_time; 1398 u8 flags; 1399 u8 pad2; 1400 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)]; 1401 } status; 1402 struct { 1403 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1404 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1405 u8 pad[4]; 1406 1407 void *rate_driver_data[ 1408 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1409 }; 1410 void *driver_data[ 1411 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1412 }; 1413 }; 1414 1415 static inline u16 1416 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1417 { 1418 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1419 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1420 */ 1421 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1422 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1423 } 1424 1425 static inline u16 1426 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1427 { 1428 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1429 } 1430 1431 /*** 1432 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1433 * 1434 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1435 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1436 * 1437 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1438 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1439 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1440 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1441 * that was used when sending the packet. 1442 */ 1443 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1444 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1445 u8 try_count; 1446 u8 tx_power_idx; 1447 }; 1448 1449 /** 1450 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1451 * 1452 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1453 * @info: Basic tx status information 1454 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1455 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1456 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1457 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1458 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1459 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1460 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1461 */ 1462 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1463 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1464 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1465 struct sk_buff *skb; 1466 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1467 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1468 u8 n_rates; 1469 1470 struct list_head *free_list; 1471 }; 1472 1473 /** 1474 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1475 * 1476 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1477 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1478 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1479 * 1480 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1481 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1482 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1483 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1484 */ 1485 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1486 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1487 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1488 const u8 *common_ies; 1489 size_t common_ie_len; 1490 }; 1491 1492 1493 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1494 { 1495 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1496 } 1497 1498 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1499 { 1500 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1501 } 1502 1503 /** 1504 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1505 * 1506 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1507 * 1508 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1509 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1510 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1511 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1512 * 1513 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1514 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1515 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1516 */ 1517 static inline void 1518 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1519 { 1520 int i; 1521 1522 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1523 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1524 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1525 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1526 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1527 /* clear the rate counts */ 1528 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1529 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1530 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1531 } 1532 1533 1534 /** 1535 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1536 * 1537 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1538 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1539 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1540 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1541 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1542 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1543 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1544 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1545 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1546 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1547 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1548 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1549 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1550 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1551 * de-duplication by itself. 1552 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1553 * the frame. 1554 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1555 * the frame. 1556 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1557 * field) is valid if this field is non-zero, and the position 1558 * where the timestamp was sampled depends on the value. 1559 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1560 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1561 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1562 * merging. 1563 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1564 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1565 * (including FCS) was received. 1566 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1567 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1568 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64: The timestamp passed in the RX status @mactime 1569 * is only for use in the radiotap timestamp header, not otherwise a valid 1570 * @mactime value. Note this is a separate flag so that we continue to see 1571 * %RX_FLAG_MACTIME as unset. Also note that in this case the timestamp is 1572 * reported to be 64 bits wide, not just 32. 1573 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1574 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1575 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1576 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1577 * each A-MPDU 1578 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1579 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1580 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1581 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1582 * on this subframe 1583 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1584 * done by the hardware 1585 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1586 * processing it in any regular way. 1587 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1588 * them for sniffing purposes. 1589 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1590 * monitor interfaces. 1591 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1592 * them for sniffing purposes. 1593 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1594 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1595 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1596 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1597 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1598 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1599 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1600 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1601 * interleaved with other frames. 1602 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the 1603 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header). 1604 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point 1605 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV 1606 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs 1607 * in the skb. 1608 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1609 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1610 * the first subframe. 1611 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1612 * be done in the hardware. 1613 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1614 * frame 1615 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1616 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1617 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1618 * 1619 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1620 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1621 * - DATA3_CODING 1622 * - DATA5_GI 1623 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1624 * - DATA6_NSTS 1625 * - DATA3_STBC 1626 * 1627 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1628 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1629 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1630 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1631 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1632 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1633 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1634 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1635 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1636 * hardware or driver) 1637 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VHT: VHT radiotap data is present 1638 */ 1639 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1640 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1641 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1642 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(2), 1643 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1644 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1645 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1646 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1647 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64 = BIT(7), 1648 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1649 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1650 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1651 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1652 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1653 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1654 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1655 /* one free bit at 15 */ 1656 RX_FLAG_MACTIME = BIT(16) | BIT(17), 1657 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = 1 << 16, 1658 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = 2 << 16, 1659 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = 3 << 16, 1660 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1661 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1662 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20), 1663 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1664 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1665 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1666 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1667 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1668 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1669 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1670 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1671 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1672 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1673 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VHT = BIT(31), 1674 }; 1675 1676 /** 1677 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1678 * 1679 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1680 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1681 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1682 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1683 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1684 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1685 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1686 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1687 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1688 */ 1689 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1690 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1691 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1692 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1693 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1694 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1695 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1696 }; 1697 1698 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1699 1700 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1701 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1702 RX_ENC_HT, 1703 RX_ENC_VHT, 1704 RX_ENC_HE, 1705 RX_ENC_EHT, 1706 RX_ENC_UHR, 1707 RX_ENC_S1G, 1708 }; 1709 1710 /** 1711 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1712 * 1713 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1714 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1715 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1716 * 1717 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1718 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1719 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1720 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1721 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1722 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1723 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1724 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1725 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1726 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1727 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1728 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1729 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1730 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1731 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1732 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1733 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1734 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1735 * values were filled. 1736 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1737 * support dB or unspecified units) 1738 * @antenna: antenna used 1739 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1740 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1741 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE, EHT and UHR only) 1742 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1743 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1744 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1745 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1746 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1747 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1748 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1749 * @eht: EHT specific rate information 1750 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1751 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1752 * @uhr: UHR specific rate information 1753 * @uhr.ru: UHR RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1754 * @uhr.gi: UHR GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1755 * @uhr.elr: UHR ELR MCS was used 1756 * @uhr.im: UHR interference mitigation was used 1757 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1758 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1759 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1760 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1761 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1762 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1763 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1764 * @link_valid. 1765 */ 1766 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1767 u64 mactime; 1768 union { 1769 u64 boottime_ns; 1770 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1771 }; 1772 u32 device_timestamp; 1773 u32 ampdu_reference; 1774 u32 flag; 1775 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1776 u8 enc_flags; 1777 u8 encoding:3, bw:4; 1778 union { 1779 struct { 1780 u8 he_ru:3; 1781 u8 he_gi:2; 1782 u8 he_dcm:1; 1783 } __packed; 1784 struct { 1785 u8 ru:4; 1786 u8 gi:2; 1787 } __packed eht; 1788 struct { 1789 u8 ru:4; 1790 u8 gi:2; 1791 u8 elr:1; 1792 u8 im:1; 1793 } __packed uhr; 1794 } __packed; 1795 u8 rate_idx; 1796 u8 nss; 1797 u8 rx_flags; 1798 u8 band; 1799 u8 antenna; 1800 s8 signal; 1801 u8 chains; 1802 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1803 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1804 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1805 }; 1806 1807 static_assert(sizeof(struct ieee80211_rx_status) <= sizeof_field(struct sk_buff, cb)); 1808 1809 static inline u32 1810 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1811 { 1812 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1813 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1814 } 1815 1816 /** 1817 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1818 * 1819 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1820 * 1821 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1822 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1823 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1824 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1825 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1826 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1827 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1828 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1829 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1830 * for more. 1831 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1832 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1833 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1834 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1835 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1836 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1837 * operating channel. 1838 */ 1839 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1840 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1841 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1842 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1843 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1844 }; 1845 1846 1847 /** 1848 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1849 * 1850 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1851 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1852 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1853 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1854 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1855 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1856 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1857 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1858 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1859 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1860 */ 1861 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1862 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1863 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1864 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1865 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1866 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1867 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1868 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1869 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1870 }; 1871 1872 /** 1873 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1874 * 1875 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1876 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1877 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1878 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1879 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1880 */ 1881 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1882 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1883 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1884 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1885 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1886 1887 /* keep last */ 1888 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1889 }; 1890 1891 /** 1892 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1893 * 1894 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1895 * 1896 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1897 * 1898 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1899 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1900 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1901 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1902 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1903 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1904 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1905 * 1906 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1907 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1908 * 1909 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1910 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1911 * 1912 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1913 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1914 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1915 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1916 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1917 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1918 * 1919 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1920 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1921 * configured for an HT channel. 1922 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1923 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1924 */ 1925 struct ieee80211_conf { 1926 u32 flags; 1927 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1928 1929 u16 listen_interval; 1930 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1931 1932 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1933 1934 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1935 bool radar_enabled; 1936 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1937 }; 1938 1939 /** 1940 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1941 * 1942 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1943 * operation. 1944 * 1945 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1946 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1947 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1948 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1949 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1950 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1951 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1952 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1953 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1954 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1955 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1956 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1957 * channel, expressed in TU. 1958 * @link_id: the link ID of the link doing the channel switch, 0 for non-MLO 1959 */ 1960 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1961 u64 timestamp; 1962 u32 device_timestamp; 1963 bool block_tx; 1964 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1965 u8 count; 1966 u8 link_id; 1967 u32 delay; 1968 }; 1969 1970 /** 1971 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1972 * 1973 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1974 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1975 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1976 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1977 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1978 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1979 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1980 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1981 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1982 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1983 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1984 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1985 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1986 * @IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE: The driver indicates that EML operation is 1987 * enabled for the interface. 1988 * @IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW: Ignore wider bandwidth OFDMA 1989 * operation on this interface and request a channel context without 1990 * the AP definition. Use this e.g. because the device is able to 1991 * handle OFDMA (downlink and trigger for uplink) on a per-AP basis. 1992 * @IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC: indicates that the AP sta should 1993 * be removed only after setting the vif as unassociated, and not the 1994 * opposite. Only relevant for STA vifs. 1995 */ 1996 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1997 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1998 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1999 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 2000 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 2001 IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE = BIT(4), 2002 IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW = BIT(5), 2003 IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC = BIT(6), 2004 }; 2005 2006 2007 /** 2008 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 2009 * 2010 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 2011 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 2012 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 2013 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 2014 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 2015 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 2016 * mac80211. 2017 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_MCAST: tx multicast encapsulation offload is enabled 2018 * The driver supports sending multicast frames passed as 802.3 frames 2019 * by mac80211. 2020 */ 2021 2022 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 2023 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 2024 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 2025 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 2026 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_MCAST = BIT(3), 2027 }; 2028 2029 #define IEEE80211_NAN_AVAIL_BLOB_MAX_LEN 54 2030 2031 /** 2032 * struct ieee80211_eml_params - EHT Operating mode notification parameters 2033 * 2034 * EML Operating mode notification parameters received in the Operating mode 2035 * notification frame. This struct is used as a container to pass the info to 2036 * the underlay driver. 2037 * 2038 * @link_id: the link ID where the Operating mode notification frame has been 2039 * received. 2040 * @control: EML control field defined in P802.11be section 9.4.1.76. 2041 * @link_bitmap: eMLSR/eMLMR enabled links defined in P802.11be 2042 * section 9.4.1.76. 2043 * @emlmr_mcs_map_count: eMLMR number of valid mcs_map_bw fields according to 2044 * P802.11be section 9.4.1.76 (valid if eMLMR mode control bit is set). 2045 * @emlmr_mcs_map_bw: eMLMR supported MCS and NSS set subfileds defined in 2046 * P802.11be section 9.4.1.76 (valid if eMLMR mode control bit is set). 2047 */ 2048 struct ieee80211_eml_params { 2049 u8 link_id; 2050 u8 control; 2051 u16 link_bitmap; 2052 u8 emlmr_mcs_map_count; 2053 u8 emlmr_mcs_map_bw[9]; 2054 }; 2055 2056 /** 2057 * struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg - NAN schedule configuration 2058 * @channels: array of NAN channels. A channel entry is in use if 2059 * channels[i].chanreq.oper.chan is not NULL. 2060 * @schedule: NAN local schedule - mapping of each 16TU time slot to 2061 * the NAN channel on which the radio will operate. NULL if unscheduled. 2062 * @avail_blob: NAN Availability attribute blob. 2063 * @avail_blob_len: length of the @avail_blob in bytes. 2064 * @deferred: indicates that the driver should notify peers before applying the 2065 * new NAN schedule, and apply the new schedule the second NAN Slot 2066 * boundary after it notified the peers, as defined in Wi-Fi Aware (TM) 4.0 2067 * specification, section 5.2.2. 2068 * The driver must call ieee80211_nan_sched_update_done() after the 2069 * schedule has been applied. 2070 * If a HW restart happened while a deferred schedule update was pending, 2071 * mac80211 will reconfigure the deferred schedule (and wait for the driver 2072 * to notify that the schedule has been applied). 2073 */ 2074 struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg { 2075 struct ieee80211_nan_channel channels[IEEE80211_NAN_MAX_CHANNELS]; 2076 struct ieee80211_nan_channel *schedule[CFG80211_NAN_SCHED_NUM_TIME_SLOTS]; 2077 u8 avail_blob[IEEE80211_NAN_AVAIL_BLOB_MAX_LEN]; 2078 u16 avail_blob_len; 2079 bool deferred; 2080 }; 2081 2082 /** 2083 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 2084 * @assoc: association status 2085 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 2086 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 2087 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 2088 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 2089 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 2090 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities as described in P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001j. 2091 * @eml_med_sync_delay: Medium Synchronization delay as described in 2092 * P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001i. 2093 * @mld_capa_op: MLD Capabilities and Operations per P802.11be_D4.1 2094 * Figure 9-1001k 2095 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 2096 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 2097 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 2098 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 2099 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 2100 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 2101 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 2102 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 2103 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 2104 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 2105 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 2106 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 2107 * your driver/device needs to do. 2108 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 2109 * (station mode only) 2110 * @nan_sched: NAN schedule parameters. &struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg 2111 */ 2112 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 2113 /* association related data */ 2114 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 2115 bool ibss_creator; 2116 bool ps; 2117 u16 aid; 2118 u16 eml_cap; 2119 u16 eml_med_sync_delay; 2120 u16 mld_capa_op; 2121 2122 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 2123 int arp_addr_cnt; 2124 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 2125 size_t ssid_len; 2126 bool s1g; 2127 bool idle; 2128 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2129 /* Protected by the wiphy mutex */ 2130 struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg nan_sched; 2131 }; 2132 2133 #define IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS 8 2134 2135 /** 2136 * struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm - negotiated TID to link map info 2137 * 2138 * @downlink: bitmap of active links per TID for downlink, or 0 if mapping for 2139 * this TID is not included. 2140 * @uplink: bitmap of active links per TID for uplink, or 0 if mapping for this 2141 * TID is not included. 2142 * @valid: info is valid or not. 2143 */ 2144 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm { 2145 u16 downlink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 2146 u16 uplink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 2147 bool valid; 2148 }; 2149 2150 /** 2151 * enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res - return value for negotiated TTLM handling 2152 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT: accept the request 2153 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT: reject the request 2154 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED: reject and suggest a new mapping 2155 */ 2156 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res { 2157 NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT, 2158 NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT, 2159 NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED 2160 }; 2161 2162 /** 2163 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 2164 * 2165 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 2166 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 2167 * 2168 * @type: type of this virtual interface 2169 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 2170 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 2171 * or the BSS we're associated to 2172 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 2173 * indexed by link ID 2174 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 2175 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 2176 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 2177 * API calls meant for that purpose. 2178 * @dormant_links: subset of the valid links that are disabled/suspended 2179 * due to advertised or negotiated TTLM respectively. 2180 * 0 for non-MLO. 2181 * @suspended_links: subset of dormant_links representing links that are 2182 * suspended due to negotiated TTLM, and could be activated in the 2183 * future by tearing down the TTLM negotiation. 2184 * 0 for non-MLO. 2185 * @neg_ttlm: negotiated TID to link mapping info. 2186 * see &struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm. 2187 * @addr: address of this interface 2188 * @addr_valid: indicates if the address is actively used. Set to false for 2189 * passive monitor interfaces, true in all other cases. 2190 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 2191 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 2192 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 2193 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 2194 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 2195 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 2196 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 2197 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 2198 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 2199 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 2200 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 2201 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 2202 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 2203 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 2204 * restrictions. 2205 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 2206 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 2207 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 2208 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 2209 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 2210 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 2211 * interface. 2212 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 2213 * for this interface. 2214 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2215 * sizeof(void \*). 2216 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 2217 * @txq_mgmt: the mgmt frame TX queue, currently only exists for NAN devices 2218 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 2219 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 2220 */ 2221 struct ieee80211_vif { 2222 enum nl80211_iftype type; 2223 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 2224 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 2225 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2226 u16 valid_links, active_links, dormant_links, suspended_links; 2227 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm neg_ttlm; 2228 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2229 bool addr_valid; 2230 bool p2p; 2231 2232 u8 cab_queue; 2233 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 2234 2235 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 2236 struct ieee80211_txq *txq_mgmt; 2237 2238 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2239 u32 driver_flags; 2240 u32 offload_flags; 2241 2242 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 2243 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 2244 #endif 2245 2246 bool probe_req_reg; 2247 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 2248 2249 /* must be last */ 2250 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2251 }; 2252 2253 /** 2254 * ieee80211_vif_usable_links - Return the usable links for the vif 2255 * @vif: the vif for which the usable links are requested 2256 * Return: the usable link bitmap 2257 */ 2258 static inline u16 ieee80211_vif_usable_links(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2259 { 2260 return vif->valid_links & ~vif->dormant_links; 2261 } 2262 2263 /** 2264 * ieee80211_vif_is_mld - Returns true iff the vif is an MLD one 2265 * @vif: the vif 2266 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD, %false otherwise. 2267 */ 2268 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mld(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2269 { 2270 /* valid_links != 0 indicates this vif is an MLD */ 2271 return vif->valid_links != 0; 2272 } 2273 2274 /** 2275 * ieee80211_vif_link_active - check if a given link is active 2276 * @vif: the vif 2277 * @link_id: the link ID to check 2278 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD and the link is active, or if 2279 * the vif is not an MLD and the link ID is 0; %false otherwise. 2280 */ 2281 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_link_active(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 2282 unsigned int link_id) 2283 { 2284 if (!ieee80211_vif_is_mld(vif)) 2285 return link_id == 0; 2286 return vif->active_links & BIT(link_id); 2287 } 2288 2289 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 2290 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 2291 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2292 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2293 (link = link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id))) 2294 2295 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2296 { 2297 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 2298 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 2299 #endif 2300 return false; 2301 } 2302 2303 /** 2304 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 2305 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 2306 * 2307 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2308 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 2309 * 2310 * Return: pointer to the wdev, or %NULL if the given wdev isn't 2311 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 2312 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 2313 */ 2314 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 2315 2316 /** 2317 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 2318 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 2319 * 2320 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2321 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 2322 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 2323 * 2324 * Return: pointer to the wdev 2325 */ 2326 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 2327 2328 static inline bool lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2329 { 2330 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->wiphy->mtx); 2331 } 2332 2333 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 2334 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2335 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2336 2337 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 2338 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2339 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2340 2341 /** 2342 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 2343 * 2344 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 2345 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 2346 * 2347 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 2348 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 2349 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 2350 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 2351 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 2352 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 2353 * generation in software. 2354 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 2355 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 2356 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 2357 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 2358 * (MFP) to be done in software. 2359 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 2360 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 2361 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 2362 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 2363 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 2364 * MIC. 2365 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 2366 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 2367 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 2368 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 2369 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 2370 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 2371 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 2372 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 2373 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 2374 * only for management frames (MFP). 2375 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 2376 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 2377 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 2378 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 2379 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 2380 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 2381 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 2382 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 2383 * for a AES_CMAC or a AES_GMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence 2384 * number generation only 2385 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU: SPP A-MSDUs can be used with this key 2386 * (set by mac80211 from the sta->spp_amsdu flag) 2387 */ 2388 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 2389 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 2390 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 2391 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 2392 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 2393 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 2394 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 2395 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 2396 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 2397 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 2398 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 2399 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 2400 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU = BIT(11), 2401 }; 2402 2403 /** 2404 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 2405 * 2406 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 2407 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 2408 * 2409 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 2410 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 2411 * encrypted in hardware. 2412 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 2413 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 2414 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 2415 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 2416 * @keyidx: the key index (0-7) 2417 * @keylen: key material length 2418 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 2419 * data block: 2420 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2421 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2422 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2423 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2424 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2425 * @link_id: the link ID, 0 for non-MLO, or -1 for pairwise keys 2426 */ 2427 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2428 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2429 u32 cipher; 2430 u8 icv_len; 2431 u8 iv_len; 2432 u8 hw_key_idx; 2433 s8 keyidx; 2434 u16 flags; 2435 s8 link_id; 2436 u8 keylen; 2437 u8 key[]; 2438 }; 2439 2440 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2441 2442 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2443 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2444 2445 /** 2446 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2447 * 2448 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2449 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2450 * reverse order than in packet) 2451 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2452 * reverse order than in packet) 2453 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2454 * reverse order than in packet) 2455 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2456 * reverse order than in packet) 2457 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2458 */ 2459 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2460 union { 2461 struct { 2462 u32 iv32; 2463 u16 iv16; 2464 } tkip; 2465 struct { 2466 u8 pn[6]; 2467 } ccmp; 2468 struct { 2469 u8 pn[6]; 2470 } aes_cmac; 2471 struct { 2472 u8 pn[6]; 2473 } aes_gmac; 2474 struct { 2475 u8 pn[6]; 2476 } gcmp; 2477 struct { 2478 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2479 u8 seq_len; 2480 } hw; 2481 }; 2482 }; 2483 2484 /** 2485 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2486 * 2487 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2488 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2489 * 2490 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2491 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2492 */ 2493 enum set_key_cmd { 2494 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2495 }; 2496 2497 /** 2498 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2499 * 2500 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2501 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2502 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2503 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2504 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2505 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2506 */ 2507 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2508 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2509 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2510 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2511 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2512 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2513 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2514 }; 2515 2516 /** 2517 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2518 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2519 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2520 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2521 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2522 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2523 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2524 * 2525 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2526 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2527 */ 2528 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2529 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2530 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2531 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2532 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2533 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2534 }; 2535 2536 #define IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_MAX IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320 2537 2538 /** 2539 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2540 * 2541 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2542 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2543 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2544 */ 2545 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2546 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2547 struct { 2548 s8 idx; 2549 u8 count; 2550 u8 count_cts; 2551 u8 count_rts; 2552 u16 flags; 2553 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2554 }; 2555 2556 /** 2557 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2558 * 2559 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2560 * 2561 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2562 * to the STA. 2563 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2564 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2565 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2566 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2567 * per peer TPC. 2568 */ 2569 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2570 s16 power; 2571 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2572 }; 2573 2574 /** 2575 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2576 * 2577 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2578 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2579 * 2580 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2581 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2582 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2583 * 2584 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2585 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2586 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2587 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2588 * 2589 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2590 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2591 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2592 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2593 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2594 */ 2595 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2596 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2597 2598 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2599 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2600 }; 2601 2602 /** 2603 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2604 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2605 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2606 * 2607 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2608 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2609 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2610 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2611 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2612 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2613 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2614 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2615 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2616 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2617 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2618 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2619 * @uhr_cap: UHR capabilities of this STA 2620 * @s1g_cap: S1G capabilities of this STA 2621 * @agg: per-link data for multi-link aggregation 2622 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with. 2623 * This is the minimum between the peer's capabilities and our own 2624 * operating channel width; Invalid for NAN since that is operating on 2625 * multiple channels. 2626 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2627 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2628 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2629 * the station moves to associated state. Invalid for NAN since it 2630 * operates on multiple configurations of rx_nss. 2631 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2632 * 2633 */ 2634 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2635 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2636 2637 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2638 u8 link_id; 2639 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2640 2641 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2642 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2643 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2644 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2645 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2646 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2647 struct ieee80211_sta_uhr_cap uhr_cap; 2648 struct ieee80211_sta_s1g_cap s1g_cap; 2649 2650 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2651 2652 u8 rx_nss; 2653 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2654 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2655 }; 2656 2657 /** 2658 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2659 * 2660 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2661 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2662 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2663 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2664 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2665 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2666 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2667 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2668 * 2669 * @addr: MAC address 2670 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2671 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2672 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2673 * Can be modified by driver. 2674 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2675 * otherwise always false) 2676 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2677 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2678 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2679 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2680 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2681 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2682 * @rates: rate control selection table 2683 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2684 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2685 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2686 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2687 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2688 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2689 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2690 * unlimited. 2691 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities of this MLO station 2692 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2693 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2694 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2695 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2696 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2697 * is used for non-data frames 2698 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2699 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2700 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2701 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2702 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2703 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2704 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2705 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2706 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2707 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2708 * by the AP. 2709 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2710 * @spp_amsdu: indicates whether the STA uses SPP A-MSDU or not. 2711 * @epp_peer: indicates that the peer is an EPP peer. 2712 * @nmi: For NDI stations, pointer to the NMI station of the peer. 2713 * @nan_sched: NAN peer schedule for this station. Valid only for NMI stations. 2714 * @ext_mld_capa_ops: the MLD's extended MLD capabilities and operations 2715 * NOTE: currently only tracked for AP STAs 2716 */ 2717 struct ieee80211_sta { 2718 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2719 u16 aid; 2720 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2721 bool wme; 2722 u8 uapsd_queues; 2723 u8 max_sp; 2724 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2725 bool tdls; 2726 bool tdls_initiator; 2727 bool mfp; 2728 bool mlo; 2729 bool spp_amsdu; 2730 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2731 u16 eml_cap; 2732 2733 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2734 2735 bool support_p2p_ps; 2736 2737 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2738 2739 u16 valid_links; 2740 u16 ext_mld_capa_ops; 2741 bool epp_peer; 2742 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2743 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2744 2745 struct ieee80211_sta __rcu *nmi; 2746 2747 /* should only be accessed with the wiphy mutex held */ 2748 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_sched *nan_sched; 2749 2750 /* must be last */ 2751 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2752 }; 2753 2754 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2755 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2756 #else 2757 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2758 { 2759 return true; 2760 } 2761 #endif 2762 2763 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2764 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2765 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2766 2767 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2768 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2769 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2770 2771 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2772 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2773 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2774 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2775 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id))) 2776 2777 /** 2778 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2779 * 2780 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2781 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2782 * 2783 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2784 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2785 */ 2786 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2787 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2788 }; 2789 2790 /** 2791 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2792 * 2793 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2794 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2795 */ 2796 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2797 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2798 }; 2799 2800 /** 2801 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2802 * 2803 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2804 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2805 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2806 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2807 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2808 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2809 * 2810 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2811 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2812 */ 2813 struct ieee80211_txq { 2814 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2815 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2816 u8 tid; 2817 u8 ac; 2818 2819 /* must be last */ 2820 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2821 }; 2822 2823 /** 2824 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2825 * 2826 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2827 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2828 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2829 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2830 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2831 * 2832 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2833 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2834 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2835 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2836 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2837 * algorithm. 2838 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2839 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2840 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2841 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2842 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2843 * CCK frames. 2844 * 2845 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2846 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2847 * the FCS at the end. 2848 * 2849 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2850 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2851 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2852 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2853 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2854 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2855 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2856 * 2857 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2858 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2859 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2860 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2861 * 2862 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2863 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2864 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2865 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2866 * 2867 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2868 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2869 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2870 * 2871 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2872 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2873 * 2874 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2875 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2876 * 2877 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2878 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2879 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2880 * 2881 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2882 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2883 * 2884 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2885 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2886 * 2887 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2888 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2889 * the stack. 2890 * 2891 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2892 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2893 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2894 * 2895 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2896 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2897 * dtim_period). 2898 * 2899 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2900 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2901 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2902 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2903 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2904 * only in that case. 2905 * 2906 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2907 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2908 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2909 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2910 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2911 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2912 * 2913 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2914 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2915 * software. 2916 * 2917 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2918 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2919 * active interfaces. 2920 * 2921 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR: The driver would like to be informed 2922 * of any monitor interface, as well as their configured channel. 2923 * This is useful for supporting multiple monitor interfaces on different 2924 * channels. 2925 * 2926 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2927 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2928 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2929 * 2930 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2931 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2932 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2933 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2934 * supported cipher suites. 2935 * 2936 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2937 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2938 * for frames. 2939 * 2940 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2941 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2942 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2943 * control for more details. 2944 * 2945 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2946 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2947 * 2948 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2949 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2950 * is supported. 2951 * 2952 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2953 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2954 * 2955 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2956 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2957 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2958 * 2959 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2960 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2961 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2962 * CSA frame. 2963 * 2964 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2965 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2966 * 2967 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2968 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2969 * 2970 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2971 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2972 * 2973 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2974 * within A-MPDU. 2975 * 2976 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2977 * for sent beacons. 2978 * 2979 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2980 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2981 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2982 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2983 * Note that this doesn't apply for NAN, in which the peer's NMI address 2984 * can be equal to its NDI address. 2985 * 2986 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2987 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2988 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2989 * timeout. 2990 * 2991 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2992 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2993 * 2994 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2995 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2996 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2997 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2998 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2999 * 3000 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 3001 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 3002 * 3003 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 3004 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 3005 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 3006 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 3007 * 3008 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 3009 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 3010 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 3011 * 3012 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 3013 * TDLS links. 3014 * 3015 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 3016 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 3017 * 3018 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 3019 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 3020 * 3021 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 3022 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 3023 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 3024 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 3025 * See also the documentation for that flag. 3026 * 3027 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 3028 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 3029 * TXQs to start with. 3030 * 3031 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 3032 * length in tx status information 3033 * 3034 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 3035 * 3036 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 3037 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 3038 * 3039 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 3040 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 3041 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 3042 * 3043 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 3044 * offload 3045 * 3046 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 3047 * offload 3048 * 3049 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 3050 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 3051 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 3052 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 3053 * the stack. 3054 * 3055 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 3056 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 3057 * 3058 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 3059 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 3060 * 3061 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING: HW requires disabling puncturing in EHT 3062 * and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 3063 * 3064 * @IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA: HW/driver handles quieting for CSA, so 3065 * no need to stop queues. This really should be set by a driver that 3066 * implements MLO, so operation can continue on other links when one 3067 * link is switching. 3068 * 3069 * @IEEE80211_HW_STRICT: strictly enforce certain things mandated by the spec 3070 * but otherwise ignored/worked around for interoperability. This is a 3071 * HW flag so drivers can opt in according to their own control, e.g. in 3072 * testing. 3073 * 3074 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_NDP_BLOCKACK: HW can transmit/receive S1G NDP 3075 * BlockAck frames. 3076 * 3077 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 3078 */ 3079 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 3080 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 3081 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 3082 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 3083 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 3084 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 3085 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 3086 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 3087 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 3088 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 3089 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 3090 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 3091 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 3092 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 3093 IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR, 3094 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 3095 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 3096 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 3097 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 3098 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 3099 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 3100 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 3101 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 3102 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 3103 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 3104 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 3105 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 3106 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 3107 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 3108 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 3109 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 3110 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 3111 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 3112 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 3113 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 3114 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 3115 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 3116 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 3117 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 3118 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 3119 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 3120 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 3121 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 3122 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 3123 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 3124 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 3125 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 3126 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 3127 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 3128 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 3129 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 3130 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 3131 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 3132 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 3133 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 3134 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING, 3135 IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA, 3136 IEEE80211_HW_STRICT, 3137 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_NDP_BLOCKACK, 3138 3139 /* keep last, obviously */ 3140 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 3141 }; 3142 3143 /** 3144 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 3145 * 3146 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 3147 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 3148 * 3149 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 3150 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 3151 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 3152 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 3153 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 3154 * 3155 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 3156 * 3157 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 3158 * along with this structure. 3159 * 3160 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 3161 * 3162 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 3163 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 3164 * 3165 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 3166 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 3167 * 3168 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 3169 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 3170 * 3171 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 3172 * that HW supports 3173 * 3174 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 3175 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 3176 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 3177 * 3178 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 3179 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 3180 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 3181 * 3182 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3183 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 3184 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3185 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 3186 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3187 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 3188 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3189 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 3190 * 3191 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 3192 * can handle. 3193 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 3194 * the hw can report back. 3195 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 3196 * 3197 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 3198 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 3199 * aggregation. 3200 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 3201 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 3202 * it shouldn't be set. 3203 * 3204 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 3205 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 3206 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 3207 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 3208 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 3209 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 3210 * 3211 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 3212 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 3213 * 3214 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 3215 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 3216 * 3217 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 3218 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 3219 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 3220 * adding _BW is supported today. 3221 * 3222 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 3223 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 3224 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 3225 * 3226 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 3227 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 3228 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 3229 * device_timestamp. 3230 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 3231 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 3232 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 3233 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 3234 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 3235 * 3236 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 3237 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 3238 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 3239 * 3240 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 3241 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 3242 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 3243 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 3244 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 3245 * neither enabled. 3246 * 3247 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 3248 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 3249 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 3250 * 3251 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 3252 * device. 3253 * 3254 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 3255 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 3256 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 3257 * 3258 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 3259 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 3260 * 3261 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 3262 * 3263 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 3264 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 3265 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 3266 * 3267 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 3268 */ 3269 struct ieee80211_hw { 3270 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 3271 struct wiphy *wiphy; 3272 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 3273 void *priv; 3274 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 3275 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 3276 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 3277 int vif_data_size; 3278 int sta_data_size; 3279 int chanctx_data_size; 3280 int txq_data_size; 3281 u16 queues; 3282 u16 max_listen_interval; 3283 s8 max_signal; 3284 u8 max_rates; 3285 u8 max_report_rates; 3286 u8 max_rate_tries; 3287 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 3288 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 3289 u8 max_tx_fragments; 3290 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 3291 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 3292 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 3293 struct { 3294 int units_pos; 3295 s16 accuracy; 3296 } radiotap_timestamp; 3297 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 3298 u8 uapsd_queues; 3299 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 3300 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 3301 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 3302 u8 weight_multiplier; 3303 u32 max_mtu; 3304 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 3305 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 3306 }; 3307 3308 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3309 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3310 { 3311 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3312 } 3313 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3314 3315 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3316 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3317 { 3318 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3319 } 3320 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3321 3322 /** 3323 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 3324 * 3325 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 3326 * @req: cfg80211 request. 3327 */ 3328 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 3329 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 3330 3331 /* Keep last */ 3332 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 3333 }; 3334 3335 /** 3336 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 3337 * 3338 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 3339 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 3340 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 3341 * @status: channel-switch response status 3342 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 3343 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3344 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3345 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 3346 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 3347 */ 3348 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 3349 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3350 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 3351 u8 action_code; 3352 u32 status; 3353 u32 timestamp; 3354 u16 switch_time; 3355 u16 switch_timeout; 3356 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 3357 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 3358 }; 3359 3360 /** 3361 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 3362 * 3363 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 3364 * 3365 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 3366 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 3367 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 3368 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 3369 * is already used internally by mac80211. 3370 * 3371 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 3372 */ 3373 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 3374 3375 /** 3376 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 3377 * 3378 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 3379 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 3380 */ 3381 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 3382 { 3383 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 3384 } 3385 3386 /** 3387 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 3388 * 3389 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 3390 * @addr: the address to set 3391 */ 3392 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 3393 { 3394 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 3395 } 3396 3397 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3398 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3399 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3400 { 3401 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 3402 return NULL; 3403 3404 if (c->band >= NUM_NL80211_BANDS) 3405 return NULL; 3406 3407 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 3408 } 3409 3410 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3411 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3412 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3413 { 3414 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 3415 return NULL; 3416 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 3417 } 3418 3419 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3420 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3421 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 3422 { 3423 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 3424 return NULL; 3425 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 3426 } 3427 3428 /** 3429 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 3430 * @hw: the hardware 3431 * @skb: the skb 3432 * 3433 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 3434 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 3435 */ 3436 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 3437 3438 /** 3439 * ieee80211_purge_tx_queue - purge TX skb queue 3440 * @hw: the hardware 3441 * @skbs: the skbs 3442 * 3443 * Free a set of transmit skbs. Use this function when device is going to stop 3444 * but some transmit skbs without TX status are still queued. 3445 * This function does not take the list lock and the caller must hold the 3446 * relevant locks to use it. 3447 */ 3448 void ieee80211_purge_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3449 struct sk_buff_head *skbs); 3450 3451 /** 3452 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 3453 * 3454 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 3455 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 3456 * 3457 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 3458 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 3459 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 3460 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 3461 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 3462 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 3463 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 3464 * 3465 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 3466 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 3467 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 3468 * 3469 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 3470 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 3471 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 3472 * hardware key index. You are free to use the full u8 range. 3473 * 3474 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 3475 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 3476 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 3477 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 3478 * 3479 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 3480 * 3481 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3482 * for it has been uploaded to hardware. The stack will not make any 3483 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3484 * based on the receive flags. 3485 * 3486 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3487 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3488 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3489 * keys. 3490 * 3491 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3492 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3493 * handler. 3494 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3495 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3496 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3497 * rekeying); it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3498 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3499 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3500 * 3501 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3502 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3503 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3504 * 3505 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3506 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3507 * requirements: 3508 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3509 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3510 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3511 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3512 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3513 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3514 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3515 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3516 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3517 */ 3518 3519 /** 3520 * DOC: Powersave support 3521 * 3522 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3523 * 3524 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself; 3525 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3526 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3527 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3528 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3529 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3530 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3531 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3532 * 3533 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3534 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3535 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3536 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3537 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3538 * 3539 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3540 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3541 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3542 * 3543 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3544 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3545 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3546 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3547 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3548 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3549 * as best as it can; mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3550 * 3551 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3552 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3553 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3554 * the next wakeup. It's a compromise of getting good enough latency when 3555 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3556 * periods. 3557 * 3558 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3559 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3560 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3561 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3562 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3563 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3564 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3565 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3566 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3567 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3568 * 3569 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3570 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3571 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3572 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3573 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3574 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3575 * 3576 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3577 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3578 */ 3579 3580 /** 3581 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3582 * 3583 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3584 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3585 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3586 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3587 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3588 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3589 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3590 * 3591 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3592 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3593 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3594 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3595 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3596 * 3597 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3598 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3599 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3600 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3601 * 3602 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3603 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3604 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3605 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3606 * 3607 * - a list of information element IDs 3608 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3609 * 3610 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3611 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3612 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3613 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3614 * vendor information elements. 3615 * 3616 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3617 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3618 * 3619 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead. Just make sure nothing 3620 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3621 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3622 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3623 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3624 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3625 * 3626 * 3627 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3628 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3629 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3630 * the received data packets). This can consist of notifying the host when 3631 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3632 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3633 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3634 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3635 * 3636 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3637 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3638 * signal strength threshold checking. 3639 */ 3640 3641 /** 3642 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3643 * 3644 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3645 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3646 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3647 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3648 * 3649 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3650 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3651 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3652 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3653 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3654 * hardware flags. 3655 * 3656 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3657 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3658 * turned off otherwise. 3659 * 3660 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3661 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3662 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3663 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3664 */ 3665 3666 /** 3667 * DOC: Frame filtering 3668 * 3669 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3670 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3671 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3672 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3673 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3674 * 3675 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3676 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3677 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3678 * 3679 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3680 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3681 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3682 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3683 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3684 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3685 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3686 * 3687 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3688 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3689 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3690 * or dropped. 3691 * 3692 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3693 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3694 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3695 * the flag, but not clear it. 3696 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3697 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3698 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3699 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3700 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3701 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3702 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3703 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3704 */ 3705 3706 /** 3707 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3708 * 3709 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3710 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3711 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3712 * 3713 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3714 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3715 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3716 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3717 * the driver code. 3718 * 3719 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3720 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3721 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3722 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3723 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3724 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3725 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3726 * 3727 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3728 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3729 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3730 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3731 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3732 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3733 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3734 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3735 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3736 * @sta_notify callback. 3737 * 3738 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3739 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3740 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3741 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3742 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3743 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3744 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3745 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3746 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3747 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3748 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3749 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3750 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3751 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3752 * 3753 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3754 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3755 * 3756 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3757 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3758 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3759 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3760 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3761 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3762 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3763 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3764 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3765 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3766 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3767 * 3768 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3769 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3770 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3771 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3772 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3773 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3774 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3775 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3776 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3777 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames. 3778 * To help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3779 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3780 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3781 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3782 * 3783 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3784 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3785 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3786 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3787 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3788 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3789 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3790 * 3791 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3792 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3793 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3794 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3795 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3796 * 3797 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3798 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3799 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3800 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3801 */ 3802 3803 /** 3804 * DOC: HW queue control 3805 * 3806 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3807 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3808 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3809 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3810 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3811 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3812 * 3813 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3814 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3815 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3816 * 3817 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3818 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3819 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3820 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3821 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3822 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3823 * the hardware queue. 3824 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3825 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3826 * 3827 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed; multiple virtual 3828 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3829 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3830 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3831 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3832 * 3833 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3834 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3835 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3836 * off-channel queue: 9 3837 * 3838 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3839 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3840 * 3841 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3842 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3843 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3844 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3845 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3846 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3847 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3848 * 3849 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3850 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3851 * 3852 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3853 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3854 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3855 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3856 */ 3857 3858 /** 3859 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3860 * 3861 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3862 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3863 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3864 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3865 * 3866 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3867 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3868 * multicast address. 3869 * 3870 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3871 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3872 * 3873 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3874 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3875 * 3876 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3877 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3878 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3879 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3880 * honour this flag if possible. 3881 * 3882 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3883 * station 3884 * 3885 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3886 * 3887 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3888 * 3889 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3890 * 3891 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3892 */ 3893 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3894 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3895 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3896 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3897 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3898 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3899 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3900 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3901 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3902 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3903 }; 3904 3905 /** 3906 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3907 * 3908 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3909 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3910 * 3911 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3912 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3913 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3914 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3915 * 3916 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3917 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3918 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3919 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3920 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3921 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3922 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3923 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3924 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3925 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3926 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3927 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3928 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3929 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3930 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3931 * session is gone and removes the station. 3932 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3933 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3934 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3935 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3936 */ 3937 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3938 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3939 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3940 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3941 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3942 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3943 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3944 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3945 }; 3946 3947 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3948 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3949 3950 /** 3951 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3952 * 3953 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3954 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3955 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3956 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3957 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3958 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3959 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3960 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3961 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3962 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3963 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3964 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3965 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3966 */ 3967 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3968 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3969 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3970 u16 tid; 3971 u16 ssn; 3972 u16 buf_size; 3973 bool amsdu; 3974 u16 timeout; 3975 }; 3976 3977 /** 3978 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3979 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3980 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3981 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3982 */ 3983 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3984 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3985 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3986 }; 3987 3988 /** 3989 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3990 * 3991 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3992 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3993 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3994 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3995 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3996 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3997 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3998 * the peer. 3999 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 4000 * by the peer 4001 */ 4002 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 4003 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 4004 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 4005 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 4006 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 4007 }; 4008 4009 /** 4010 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 4011 * 4012 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 4013 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 4014 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 4015 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 4016 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 4017 * 4018 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 4019 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 4020 * for sending management frames offchannel. 4021 */ 4022 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 4023 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 4024 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 4025 }; 4026 4027 /** 4028 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 4029 * 4030 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 4031 * reconfiguration type was completed. 4032 * 4033 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 4034 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 4035 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 4036 * of wowlan configuration) 4037 */ 4038 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 4039 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 4040 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 4041 }; 4042 4043 /** 4044 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 4045 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 4046 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 4047 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 4048 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 4049 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 4050 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 4051 * @was_assoc: set if this call is due to deauth/disassoc 4052 * while just having been associated 4053 * @link_id: the link id on which the frame will be TX'ed. 4054 * 0 for a non-MLO connection. 4055 */ 4056 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 4057 u16 duration; 4058 u16 subtype; 4059 u8 success:1, was_assoc:1; 4060 int link_id; 4061 }; 4062 4063 /** 4064 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 4065 * 4066 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 4067 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 4068 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 4069 * 4070 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 4071 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 4072 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 4073 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 4074 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 4075 * Must be atomic. 4076 * 4077 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 4078 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 4079 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 4080 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 4081 * or zero. 4082 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 4083 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 4084 * is added. 4085 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 4086 * 4087 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 4088 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 4089 * it must turn off frame reception.) 4090 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 4091 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 4092 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 4093 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 4094 * 4095 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 4096 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 4097 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 4098 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 4099 * reconfigured at resume time. 4100 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 4101 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 4102 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 4103 * must return 1 from this function. 4104 * 4105 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 4106 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 4107 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 4108 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 4109 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 4110 * 4111 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 4112 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 4113 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 4114 * in suspend(). 4115 * 4116 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 4117 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 4118 * and @stop must be implemented. 4119 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 4120 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 4121 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 4122 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 4123 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 4124 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 4125 * 4126 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 4127 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 4128 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 4129 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 4130 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 4131 * 4132 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 4133 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 4134 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 4135 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 4136 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 4137 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 4138 * MAC address of the device going away. 4139 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 4140 * 4141 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 4142 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 4143 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 4144 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 4145 * 4146 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 4147 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 4148 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 4149 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 4150 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 4151 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 4152 * can sleep. 4153 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 4154 * are not implemented. 4155 * 4156 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 4157 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 4158 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 4159 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 4160 * The callback can sleep. 4161 * 4162 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 4163 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 4164 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 4165 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 4166 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 4167 * non-MLO connections. 4168 * The callback can sleep. 4169 * 4170 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 4171 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 4172 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 4173 * 4174 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 4175 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 4176 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 4177 * 4178 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 4179 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 4180 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 4181 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 4182 * which flags are changed. 4183 * This callback can sleep. 4184 * 4185 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 4186 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 4187 * 4188 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 4189 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 4190 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 4191 * is enabled. 4192 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 4193 * The callback can sleep. 4194 * 4195 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 4196 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 4197 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 4198 * The callback must be atomic. 4199 * 4200 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 4201 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 4202 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 4203 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 4204 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 4205 * 4206 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 4207 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 4208 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 4209 * 4210 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 4211 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 4212 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 4213 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 4214 * that power save is disabled. 4215 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 4216 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 4217 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 4218 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 4219 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 4220 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 4221 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 4222 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 4223 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 4224 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 4225 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 4226 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 4227 * The callback can sleep. 4228 * 4229 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 4230 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 4231 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 4232 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 4233 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 4234 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 4235 * The callback can sleep. 4236 * 4237 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 4238 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 4239 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 4240 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 4241 * 4242 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 4243 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 4244 * 4245 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 4246 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 4247 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 4248 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 4249 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 4250 * 4251 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 4252 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 4253 * this notification. 4254 * The callback can sleep. 4255 * 4256 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 4257 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 4258 * The callback can sleep. 4259 * 4260 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 4261 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 4262 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 4263 * The callback must be atomic. 4264 * 4265 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 4266 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 4267 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 4268 * should be set as well. 4269 * The callback can sleep. 4270 * 4271 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 4272 * The callback can sleep. 4273 * 4274 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 4275 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 4276 * 4277 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 4278 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 4279 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 4280 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 4281 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4282 * This callback can sleep. 4283 * 4284 * @vif_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add a debugfs vif 4285 * directory with its files. This callback should be within a 4286 * CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4287 * 4288 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4289 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within 4290 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4291 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf 4292 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4293 * 4294 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4295 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 4296 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4297 * callback can sleep. 4298 * 4299 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4300 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 4301 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4302 * callback can sleep. 4303 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 4304 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4305 * 4306 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 4307 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 4308 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 4309 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 4310 * 4311 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 4312 * power for the station. 4313 * This callback can sleep. 4314 * 4315 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 4316 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 4317 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 4318 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 4319 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 4320 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 4321 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 4322 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4323 * The callback can sleep. 4324 * 4325 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 4326 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 4327 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 4328 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 4329 * in @sta_state. 4330 * The callback can sleep. 4331 * 4332 * @link_sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can 4333 * be used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 4334 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 4335 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 4336 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 4337 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 4338 * Must be atomic. 4339 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 4340 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 4341 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 4342 * 4343 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 4344 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 4345 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 4346 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 4347 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 4348 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 4349 * The callback can sleep. 4350 * 4351 * @link_sta_statistics: Get link statistics for this station. For example with 4352 * beacon filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be 4353 * accurate, so let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can 4354 * fill most of the values (indicating which by setting the filled 4355 * bitmap), but not all of them make sense - see the source for which 4356 * ones are possible. 4357 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 4358 * The callback can sleep. 4359 * 4360 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 4361 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 4362 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 4363 * The callback can sleep. 4364 * 4365 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 4366 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 4367 * required function. 4368 * The callback can sleep. 4369 * 4370 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 4371 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 4372 * required function. 4373 * The callback can sleep. 4374 * 4375 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 4376 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 4377 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 4378 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 4379 * The callback can sleep. 4380 * 4381 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 4382 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 4383 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 4384 * TSF synchronization. 4385 * The callback can sleep. 4386 * 4387 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 4388 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 4389 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 4390 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 4391 * The callback can sleep. 4392 * 4393 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 4394 * 4395 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 4396 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 4397 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 4398 * The callback can sleep. 4399 * 4400 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 4401 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 4402 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 4403 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 4404 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 4405 * 4406 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 4407 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 4408 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 4409 * 4410 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 4411 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 4412 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 4413 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 4414 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 4415 * Note that vif can be NULL. 4416 * The callback can sleep. 4417 * 4418 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for 4419 * the given station, as it's about to be removed. 4420 * The callback can sleep. 4421 * 4422 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 4423 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 4424 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 4425 * completion of the channel switch. 4426 * 4427 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 4428 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 4429 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 4430 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 4431 * 4432 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 4433 * 4434 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 4435 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 4436 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 4437 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 4438 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 4439 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 4440 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 4441 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 4442 * must be accepted in this case. 4443 * This callback may sleep. 4444 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 4445 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 4446 * 4447 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 4448 * 4449 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 4450 * 4451 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 4452 * queues before entering power save. 4453 * 4454 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 4455 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 4456 * The callback can sleep. 4457 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 4458 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 4459 * The callback must be atomic. 4460 * 4461 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 4462 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 4463 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 4464 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 4465 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 4466 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 4467 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 4468 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 4469 * more-data bit must always be set. 4470 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 4471 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 4472 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 4473 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 4474 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4475 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 4476 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 4477 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 4478 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 4479 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 4480 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 4481 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 4482 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 4483 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 4484 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 4485 * This callback must be atomic. 4486 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 4487 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 4488 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 4489 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 4490 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 4491 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 4492 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4493 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 4494 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 4495 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 4496 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 4497 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 4498 * This callback must be atomic. 4499 * 4500 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 4501 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4502 * expected to return a static value. 4503 * 4504 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 4505 * 4506 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 4507 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 4508 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4509 * expected to return a static value. 4510 * 4511 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 4512 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4513 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4514 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4515 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4516 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4517 * management frame prior to transmitting that frame to allow the driver 4518 * to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response and be 4519 * able to synchronize with the GO. 4520 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4521 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4522 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4523 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4524 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4525 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4526 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4527 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4528 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4529 * Note that this isn't always called for each mgd_prepare_tx() call, for 4530 * example for SAE the 'confirm' messages can be on the air in any order. 4531 * 4532 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4533 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4534 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4535 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4536 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4537 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4538 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4539 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4540 * 4541 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4542 * This callback may sleep. 4543 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4544 * This callback may sleep. 4545 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4546 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4547 * channel context with different settings 4548 * This callback may sleep. 4549 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4550 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4551 * This callback may sleep. 4552 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4553 * unbound from vif. 4554 * This callback may sleep. 4555 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4556 * another, as specified in the list of 4557 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4558 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4559 * This callback may sleep. 4560 * 4561 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4562 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4563 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4564 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4565 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4566 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4567 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4568 * 4569 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4570 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4571 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4572 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4573 * This callback may sleep. 4574 * 4575 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4576 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4577 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4578 * 4579 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4580 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4581 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4582 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4583 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4584 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4585 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4586 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4587 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4588 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4589 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4590 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4591 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4592 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4593 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4594 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4595 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4596 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4597 * when channel switch procedure was aborted, allowing the 4598 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4599 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4600 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4601 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4602 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4603 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4604 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4605 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4606 * 4607 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4608 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4609 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4610 * 4611 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4612 * and hardware limits. 4613 * 4614 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4615 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4616 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4617 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4618 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4619 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4620 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4621 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4622 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4623 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4624 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4625 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4626 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4627 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4628 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4629 * the function call. 4630 * 4631 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4632 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4633 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4634 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4635 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4636 * 4637 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4638 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4639 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4640 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4641 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4642 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4643 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4644 * changed parameters. 4645 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4646 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4647 * this call. 4648 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4649 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4650 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4651 * @nan_peer_sched_changed: Notifies the driver that the peer NAN schedule 4652 * has changed. The new schedule is available via sta->nan_sched. 4653 * Note that the channel_entry blob might not match the actual chandef 4654 * since the bandwidth of the chandef is the minimum of the local and peer 4655 * bandwidth. It is the driver responsibility to remove the peer schedule 4656 * when the NMI station is removed. 4657 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4658 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4659 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4660 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4661 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4662 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4663 * 4664 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4665 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4666 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4667 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4668 * This callback may sleep. 4669 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4670 * This callback may sleep. 4671 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4672 * 4-address mode 4673 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4674 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4675 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4676 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4677 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4678 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4679 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4680 * twt structure. 4681 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4682 * from the peer. 4683 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4684 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4685 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4686 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4687 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4688 * radar channel. 4689 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4690 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4691 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4692 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4693 * @can_activate_links: Checks if a specific active_links bitmap is 4694 * supported by the driver. 4695 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4696 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4697 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4698 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4699 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4700 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4701 * Note that removal of link should always succeed, so the return value 4702 * will be ignored in a removal only case. 4703 * This callback can sleep. 4704 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4705 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4706 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4707 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4708 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4709 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is 4710 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of 4711 * that. 4712 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware 4713 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif. 4714 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid 4715 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown. 4716 * @can_neg_ttlm: for managed interface, requests the driver to determine 4717 * if the requested TID-To-Link mapping can be accepted or not. 4718 * If it's not accepted the driver may suggest a preferred mapping and 4719 * modify @ttlm parameter with the suggested TID-to-Link mapping. 4720 * @prep_add_interface: prepare for interface addition. This can be used by 4721 * drivers to prepare for the addition of a new interface, e.g., allocate 4722 * the needed resources etc. This callback doesn't guarantee that an 4723 * interface with the specified type would be added, and thus drivers that 4724 * implement this callback need to handle such cases. The type is the full 4725 * &enum nl80211_iftype. 4726 * @set_eml_op_mode: Configure eMLSR/eMLMR operation mode in the underlay 4727 * driver according to the parameter received in the EML Operating mode 4728 * notification frame. 4729 */ 4730 struct ieee80211_ops { 4731 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4732 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4733 struct sk_buff *skb); 4734 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4735 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool suspend); 4736 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4737 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4738 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4739 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4740 #endif 4741 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4742 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4743 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4744 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4745 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4746 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4747 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4748 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, u32 changed); 4749 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4750 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4751 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4752 u64 changed); 4753 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4754 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4755 u64 changed); 4756 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4757 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4758 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4759 u64 changed); 4760 4761 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4762 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4763 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4764 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4765 4766 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4767 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4768 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4769 unsigned int changed_flags, 4770 unsigned int *total_flags, 4771 u64 multicast); 4772 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4773 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4774 unsigned int filter_flags, 4775 unsigned int changed_flags); 4776 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4777 bool set); 4778 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4779 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4780 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4781 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4782 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4783 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4784 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4785 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4786 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4787 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4788 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4789 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4790 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4791 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4792 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4793 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4794 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4795 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4796 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4797 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4798 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4799 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4800 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4801 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4802 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4803 const u8 *mac_addr); 4804 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4805 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4806 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4807 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4808 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4809 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4810 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4811 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4812 u32 value); 4813 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4814 u32 value); 4815 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4816 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4817 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4818 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4819 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4820 void (*vif_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4821 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4822 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4823 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4824 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4825 struct dentry *dir); 4826 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4827 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4828 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4829 struct dentry *dir); 4830 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4831 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4832 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4833 struct dentry *dir); 4834 #endif 4835 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4836 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4837 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4838 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4839 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4840 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4841 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4842 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4843 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4844 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4845 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4846 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4847 void (*link_sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4848 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4849 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4850 u32 changed); 4851 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4852 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4853 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4854 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4855 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4856 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4857 struct station_info *sinfo); 4858 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4859 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4860 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4861 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4862 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4863 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4864 u64 tsf); 4865 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4866 s64 offset); 4867 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4868 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4869 void (*link_sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4870 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4871 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4872 struct link_station_info *link_sinfo); 4873 4874 /** 4875 * @ampdu_action: 4876 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4877 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4878 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4879 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4880 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4881 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4882 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4883 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4884 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4885 * 4886 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4887 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4888 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4889 * 4890 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4891 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4892 * 4893 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4894 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4895 * - ``TX: 81`` 4896 * 4897 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4898 * 4899 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4900 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4901 * if the session can start immediately. 4902 * 4903 * The callback can sleep. 4904 */ 4905 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4906 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4907 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4908 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4909 struct survey_info *survey); 4910 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4911 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4912 s16 coverage_class); 4913 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4914 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4915 void *data, int len); 4916 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4917 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4918 void *data, int len); 4919 #endif 4920 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4921 u32 queues, bool drop); 4922 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4923 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4924 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4925 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4926 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4927 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4928 u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4929 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4930 u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4931 4932 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4933 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4934 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4935 int duration, 4936 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4937 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4938 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4939 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4940 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4941 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4942 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4943 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4944 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4945 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4946 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4947 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4948 4949 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4950 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4951 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4952 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4953 bool more_data); 4954 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4955 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4956 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4957 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4958 bool more_data); 4959 4960 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4961 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4962 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4963 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4964 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4965 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4966 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4967 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4968 4969 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4970 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4971 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4972 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4973 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4974 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4975 4976 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4977 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4978 unsigned int link_id); 4979 4980 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4981 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4982 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4983 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4984 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4985 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4986 u32 changed); 4987 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4988 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4989 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4990 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4991 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4992 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4993 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4994 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4995 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4996 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4997 int n_vifs, 4998 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4999 5000 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5001 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 5002 5003 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 5004 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5005 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5006 struct inet6_dev *idev); 5007 #endif 5008 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5009 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5010 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 5011 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5012 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5013 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 5014 5015 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5016 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5017 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 5018 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5019 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5020 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 5021 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5022 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5023 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 5024 5025 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5026 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5027 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5028 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5029 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5030 unsigned int link_id, int *dbm); 5031 5032 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5033 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5034 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 5035 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 5036 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 5037 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5038 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5039 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5040 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5041 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5042 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 5043 5044 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5045 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 5046 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5047 5048 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5049 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5050 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 5051 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5052 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5053 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5054 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5055 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 5056 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5057 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5058 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 5059 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5060 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5061 u8 instance_id); 5062 int (*nan_peer_sched_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5063 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5064 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5065 struct sk_buff *head, 5066 struct sk_buff *skb); 5067 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5068 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5069 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 5070 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5071 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 5072 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5073 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 5074 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5075 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5076 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5077 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 5078 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5079 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5080 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 5081 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5082 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5083 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5084 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 5085 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5086 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 5087 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5088 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5089 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 5090 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5091 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5092 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 5093 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5094 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 5095 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5096 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 5097 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5098 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5099 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5100 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 5101 struct net_device_path *path); 5102 bool (*can_activate_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5103 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5104 u16 active_links); 5105 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5106 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5107 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 5108 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 5109 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5110 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5111 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5112 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 5113 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5114 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5115 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts); 5116 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5117 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5118 struct net_device *dev, 5119 enum tc_setup_type type, 5120 void *type_data); 5121 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res 5122 (*can_neg_ttlm)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5123 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm *ttlm); 5124 void (*prep_add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5125 enum nl80211_iftype type); 5126 int (*set_eml_op_mode)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5127 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5128 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5129 struct ieee80211_eml_params *eml_params); 5130 }; 5131 5132 /** 5133 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 5134 * 5135 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 5136 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 5137 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 5138 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 5139 * @priv_data_len. 5140 * 5141 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 5142 * @ops: callbacks for this device 5143 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 5144 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 5145 * 5146 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 5147 */ 5148 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 5149 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 5150 const char *requested_name); 5151 5152 /** 5153 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 5154 * 5155 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 5156 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 5157 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 5158 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 5159 * @priv_data_len. 5160 * 5161 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 5162 * @ops: callbacks for this device 5163 * 5164 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 5165 */ 5166 static inline 5167 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 5168 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 5169 { 5170 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 5171 } 5172 5173 /** 5174 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 5175 * 5176 * You must call this function before any other functions in 5177 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 5178 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 5179 * 5180 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5181 * 5182 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 5183 */ 5184 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5185 5186 /** 5187 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 5188 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 5189 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 5190 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 5191 */ 5192 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 5193 int throughput; 5194 int blink_time; 5195 }; 5196 5197 /** 5198 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 5199 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 5200 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 5201 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 5202 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 5203 */ 5204 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 5205 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 5206 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 5207 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 5208 }; 5209 5210 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5211 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5212 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5213 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5214 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5215 const char * 5216 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5217 unsigned int flags, 5218 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 5219 unsigned int blink_table_len); 5220 #endif 5221 /** 5222 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 5223 * 5224 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5225 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5226 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5227 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5228 * 5229 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5230 * 5231 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5232 */ 5233 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5234 { 5235 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5236 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 5237 #else 5238 return NULL; 5239 #endif 5240 } 5241 5242 /** 5243 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 5244 * 5245 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5246 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5247 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5248 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5249 * 5250 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5251 * 5252 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5253 */ 5254 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5255 { 5256 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5257 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 5258 #else 5259 return NULL; 5260 #endif 5261 } 5262 5263 /** 5264 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 5265 * 5266 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5267 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5268 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5269 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5270 * 5271 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5272 * 5273 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5274 */ 5275 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5276 { 5277 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5278 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 5279 #else 5280 return NULL; 5281 #endif 5282 } 5283 5284 /** 5285 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 5286 * 5287 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5288 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5289 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5290 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5291 * 5292 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5293 * 5294 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5295 */ 5296 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5297 { 5298 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5299 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 5300 #else 5301 return NULL; 5302 #endif 5303 } 5304 5305 /** 5306 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 5307 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 5308 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 5309 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 5310 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 5311 * 5312 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 5313 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 5314 * 5315 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 5316 */ 5317 static inline const char * 5318 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 5319 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 5320 unsigned int blink_table_len) 5321 { 5322 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5323 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 5324 blink_table_len); 5325 #else 5326 return NULL; 5327 #endif 5328 } 5329 5330 /** 5331 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 5332 * 5333 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 5334 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 5335 * 5336 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 5337 */ 5338 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5339 5340 /** 5341 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 5342 * 5343 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 5344 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 5345 * before calling this function. 5346 * 5347 * @hw: the hardware to free 5348 */ 5349 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5350 5351 /** 5352 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 5353 * 5354 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 5355 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 5356 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 5357 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 5358 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 5359 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 5360 * 5361 * @hw: the hardware to restart 5362 */ 5363 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5364 5365 /** 5366 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 5367 * 5368 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5369 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5370 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5371 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5372 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5373 * 5374 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5375 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5376 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5377 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5378 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5379 * 5380 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 5381 * 5382 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5383 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5384 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5385 * @list: the destination list 5386 */ 5387 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5388 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 5389 5390 /** 5391 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 5392 * 5393 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5394 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5395 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5396 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5397 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5398 * 5399 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5400 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5401 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5402 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5403 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5404 * 5405 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 5406 * 5407 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5408 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5409 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5410 * @napi: the NAPI context 5411 */ 5412 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5413 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 5414 5415 /** 5416 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 5417 * 5418 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5419 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5420 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5421 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5422 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5423 * 5424 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5425 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5426 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5427 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5428 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5429 * 5430 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5431 * 5432 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5433 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5434 */ 5435 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 5436 { 5437 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 5438 } 5439 5440 /** 5441 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 5442 * 5443 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 5444 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5445 * 5446 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 5447 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 5448 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5449 * 5450 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5451 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5452 */ 5453 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 5454 5455 /** 5456 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 5457 * 5458 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 5459 * (internally disables bottom halves). 5460 * 5461 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 5462 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5463 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5464 * 5465 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5466 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5467 */ 5468 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5469 struct sk_buff *skb) 5470 { 5471 local_bh_disable(); 5472 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 5473 local_bh_enable(); 5474 } 5475 5476 /** 5477 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 5478 * 5479 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 5480 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 5481 * entering/leaving PS mode. 5482 * 5483 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 5484 * 5485 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 5486 * each other. 5487 * 5488 * @sta: currently connected sta 5489 * @start: start or stop PS 5490 * 5491 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 5492 */ 5493 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 5494 5495 /** 5496 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 5497 * (in process context) 5498 * 5499 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 5500 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 5501 * applies. 5502 * 5503 * @sta: currently connected sta 5504 * @start: start or stop PS 5505 * 5506 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 5507 */ 5508 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5509 bool start) 5510 { 5511 int ret; 5512 5513 local_bh_disable(); 5514 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 5515 local_bh_enable(); 5516 5517 return ret; 5518 } 5519 5520 /** 5521 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 5522 * @sta: currently connected station 5523 * 5524 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5525 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 5526 * connected station was received. 5527 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5528 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 5529 * be serialized. 5530 */ 5531 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5532 5533 /** 5534 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 5535 * @sta: currently connected station 5536 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 5537 * 5538 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5539 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 5540 * from a connected station was received. 5541 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5542 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 5543 * serialized. 5544 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 5545 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 5546 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 5547 * checks. 5548 */ 5549 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 5550 5551 /* 5552 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 5553 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 5554 */ 5555 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 5556 5557 /** 5558 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 5559 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 5560 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 5561 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 5562 * 5563 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 5564 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 5565 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 5566 * 5567 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 5568 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 5569 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 5570 * call! Beware of the locking!) 5571 * 5572 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 5573 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 5574 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 5575 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 5576 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 5577 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 5578 * 5579 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 5580 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 5581 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 5582 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 5583 * use this API. 5584 */ 5585 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5586 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5587 5588 /** 5589 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5590 * 5591 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5592 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5593 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5594 * 5595 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5596 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5597 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5598 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5599 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5600 */ 5601 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5602 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5603 struct sk_buff *skb, 5604 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5605 int max_rates); 5606 5607 /** 5608 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5609 * 5610 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5611 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5612 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5613 * 5614 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5615 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5616 * @info: tx status information 5617 */ 5618 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5619 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5620 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5621 5622 /** 5623 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb - transmit status callback 5624 * 5625 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5626 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5627 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5628 * 5629 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5630 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5631 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5632 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5633 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5634 * 5635 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5636 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5637 */ 5638 void ieee80211_tx_status_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5639 struct sk_buff *skb); 5640 5641 /** 5642 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5643 * 5644 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5645 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5646 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5647 * 5648 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5649 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5650 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5651 * 5652 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5653 * @status: tx status information 5654 */ 5655 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5656 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5657 5658 /** 5659 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5660 * 5661 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5662 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5663 * specific skbs. 5664 * 5665 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5666 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5667 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5668 * 5669 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5670 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5671 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5672 * @info: tx status information 5673 */ 5674 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5675 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5676 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5677 { 5678 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5679 .sta = sta, 5680 .info = info, 5681 }; 5682 5683 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5684 } 5685 5686 /** 5687 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5688 * 5689 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in process context. 5690 * 5691 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5692 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5693 * for a single hardware. 5694 * 5695 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5696 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5697 */ 5698 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5699 struct sk_buff *skb) 5700 { 5701 local_bh_disable(); 5702 ieee80211_tx_status_skb(hw, skb); 5703 local_bh_enable(); 5704 } 5705 5706 /** 5707 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5708 * 5709 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in IRQ context 5710 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5711 * 5712 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5713 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5714 * 5715 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5716 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5717 */ 5718 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5719 struct sk_buff *skb); 5720 5721 /** 5722 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5723 * 5724 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5725 * connected STA. 5726 * 5727 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5728 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5729 */ 5730 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5731 5732 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5733 5734 /** 5735 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5736 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5737 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5738 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5739 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5740 * should be ignored. 5741 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5742 */ 5743 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5744 u16 tim_offset; 5745 u16 tim_length; 5746 5747 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5748 u16 mbssid_off; 5749 }; 5750 5751 /** 5752 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5753 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5754 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5755 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5756 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5757 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5758 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5759 * 5760 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5761 * obtain the beacon template. 5762 * 5763 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5764 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5765 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5766 * applicable, the CSA count. 5767 * 5768 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5769 * 5770 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5771 */ 5772 struct sk_buff * 5773 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5774 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5775 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5776 unsigned int link_id); 5777 5778 /** 5779 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation 5780 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5781 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5782 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5783 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5784 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP). 5785 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set. 5786 * 5787 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5788 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the 5789 * requested index. 5790 * 5791 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates. 5792 */ 5793 struct sk_buff * 5794 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5795 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5796 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5797 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index); 5798 5799 /** 5800 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons 5801 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons. 5802 * 5803 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons. 5804 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon 5805 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5806 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5807 */ 5808 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons { 5809 u8 cnt; 5810 struct { 5811 struct sk_buff *skb; 5812 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs; 5813 } bcn[]; 5814 }; 5815 5816 /** 5817 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation 5818 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5819 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5820 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5821 * 5822 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5823 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required 5824 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only 5825 * one multiple BSSID element. 5826 * 5827 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory. 5828 * 5829 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *. 5830 * %NULL on error. 5831 */ 5832 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons * 5833 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5834 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5835 unsigned int link_id); 5836 5837 /** 5838 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list 5839 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers. 5840 * 5841 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling 5842 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list() 5843 */ 5844 void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons); 5845 5846 /** 5847 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5848 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5849 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5850 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5851 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5852 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5853 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5854 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5855 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5856 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5857 * 5858 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5859 * obtain the beacon frame. 5860 * 5861 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5862 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5863 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5864 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5865 * 5866 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5867 * 5868 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5869 */ 5870 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5871 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5872 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5873 unsigned int link_id); 5874 5875 /** 5876 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5877 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5878 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5879 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5880 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5881 * 5882 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5883 * 5884 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5885 */ 5886 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5887 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5888 unsigned int link_id) 5889 { 5890 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5891 } 5892 5893 /** 5894 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5895 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5896 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5897 * 5898 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5899 * This function is called implicitly when 5900 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5901 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5902 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5903 * 5904 * Return: new countdown value 5905 */ 5906 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5907 unsigned int link_id); 5908 5909 /** 5910 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5911 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5912 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5913 * 5914 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5915 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5916 * 5917 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5918 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5919 */ 5920 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5921 5922 /** 5923 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5924 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5925 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5926 * 5927 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5928 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5929 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5930 */ 5931 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id); 5932 5933 /** 5934 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5935 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5936 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5937 * 5938 * Return: %true if the countdown reached 1, %false otherwise 5939 */ 5940 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5941 unsigned int link_id); 5942 5943 /** 5944 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5945 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5946 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5947 * 5948 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5949 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5950 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5951 */ 5952 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 link_id); 5953 5954 /** 5955 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5956 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5957 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5958 * 5959 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5960 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5961 * 5962 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5963 * 5964 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5965 */ 5966 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5967 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5968 5969 /** 5970 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5971 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5972 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5973 * 5974 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5975 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5976 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5977 * 5978 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5979 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5980 * 5981 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5982 */ 5983 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5984 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5985 5986 /** 5987 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5988 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5989 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5990 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 5991 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 5992 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 5993 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5994 * if at all possible 5995 * 5996 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5997 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5998 * BSSID and address is used. 5999 * 6000 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 6001 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 6002 * 6003 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 6004 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 6005 * 6006 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 6007 */ 6008 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6009 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6010 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 6011 6012 /** 6013 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6014 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6015 * @src_addr: source MAC address 6016 * @ssid: SSID buffer 6017 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 6018 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 6019 * 6020 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6021 * hardware. 6022 * 6023 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6024 */ 6025 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6026 const u8 *src_addr, 6027 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 6028 size_t tailroom); 6029 6030 /** 6031 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 6032 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6033 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6034 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 6035 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 6036 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6037 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 6038 * 6039 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 6040 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6041 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 6042 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 6043 */ 6044 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6045 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 6046 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 6047 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 6048 6049 /** 6050 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 6051 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6052 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6053 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 6054 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6055 * 6056 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 6057 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6058 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 6059 * 6060 * Return: The duration. 6061 */ 6062 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6063 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 6064 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 6065 6066 /** 6067 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 6068 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6069 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6070 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 6071 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 6072 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6073 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 6074 * 6075 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 6076 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6077 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 6078 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 6079 */ 6080 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6081 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6082 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 6083 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 6084 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 6085 6086 /** 6087 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 6088 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6089 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6090 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 6091 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6092 * 6093 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 6094 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6095 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 6096 * 6097 * Return: The duration. 6098 */ 6099 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6100 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6101 size_t frame_len, 6102 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 6103 6104 /** 6105 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 6106 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6107 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6108 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 6109 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 6110 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 6111 * 6112 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 6113 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 6114 * 6115 * Return: The duration. 6116 */ 6117 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6118 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6119 enum nl80211_band band, 6120 size_t frame_len, 6121 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 6122 6123 /** 6124 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 6125 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6126 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6127 * 6128 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 6129 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 6130 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 6131 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 6132 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 6133 * 6134 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 6135 * frames are available. 6136 * 6137 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 6138 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 6139 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 6140 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 6141 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 6142 * use common code for all beacons. 6143 */ 6144 struct sk_buff * 6145 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6146 6147 /** 6148 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 6149 * 6150 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 6151 * 6152 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6153 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 6154 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 6155 */ 6156 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6157 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 6158 6159 /** 6160 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 6161 * 6162 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 6163 * from the given packet. 6164 * 6165 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6166 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 6167 * with this P1K 6168 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 6169 */ 6170 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6171 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 6172 { 6173 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 6174 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 6175 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 6176 6177 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 6178 } 6179 6180 /** 6181 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 6182 * 6183 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 6184 * and transmitter address. 6185 * 6186 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6187 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 6188 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 6189 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 6190 */ 6191 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6192 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 6193 6194 /** 6195 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 6196 * 6197 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 6198 * in the packet. 6199 * 6200 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6201 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 6202 * encrypted with this key 6203 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 6204 */ 6205 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6206 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 6207 6208 /** 6209 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 6210 * 6211 * @pos: start of crypto header 6212 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6213 * @pn: PN to add 6214 * 6215 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 6216 * the packet payload) 6217 * 6218 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 6219 * point to the crypto header) 6220 */ 6221 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 6222 6223 /** 6224 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 6225 * 6226 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6227 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 6228 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 6229 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 6230 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 6231 * 6232 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 6233 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 6234 * by the device and not by mac80211. 6235 * 6236 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 6237 * can be done concurrently. 6238 */ 6239 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6240 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 6241 6242 /** 6243 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 6244 * 6245 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6246 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 6247 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 6248 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 6249 * @seq: new sequence data 6250 * 6251 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 6252 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 6253 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 6254 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 6255 * 6256 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 6257 * can be done concurrently. 6258 */ 6259 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6260 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 6261 6262 /** 6263 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 6264 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 6265 * @idx: the keyidx of the key 6266 * @key_data: the key data 6267 * @key_len: the key data. Might be bigger than the actual key length, 6268 * but not smaller (for the driver convinence) 6269 * @link_id: the link id of the key or -1 for non-MLO 6270 * 6271 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 6272 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 6273 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 6274 * 6275 * Return: the newly allocated key structure, which will have 6276 * similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 6277 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 6278 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 6279 * 6280 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 6281 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 6282 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 6283 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 6284 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 6285 * of the reconfiguration. 6286 * 6287 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 6288 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 6289 * 6290 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 6291 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. 6292 */ 6293 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 6294 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6295 u8 idx, u8 *key_data, u8 key_len, 6296 int link_id); 6297 6298 /** 6299 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 6300 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 6301 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 6302 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 6303 * @gfp: allocation flags 6304 */ 6305 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 6306 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 6307 6308 /** 6309 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 6310 * 6311 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6312 * at the same time. 6313 * 6314 * @keyconf: the key in question 6315 */ 6316 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6317 6318 /** 6319 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 6320 * 6321 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6322 * at the same time. 6323 * 6324 * @keyconf: the key in question 6325 */ 6326 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6327 6328 /** 6329 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 6330 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6331 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6332 * 6333 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 6334 */ 6335 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6336 6337 /** 6338 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 6339 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6340 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6341 * 6342 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 6343 */ 6344 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6345 6346 /** 6347 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 6348 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6349 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6350 * 6351 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 6352 * 6353 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 6354 */ 6355 6356 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6357 6358 /** 6359 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 6360 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6361 * 6362 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 6363 */ 6364 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6365 6366 /** 6367 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 6368 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6369 * 6370 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 6371 */ 6372 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6373 6374 /** 6375 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 6376 * 6377 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 6378 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 6379 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 6380 * any context, including hardirq context. 6381 * 6382 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 6383 * @info: information about the completed scan 6384 */ 6385 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6386 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 6387 6388 /** 6389 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 6390 * 6391 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 6392 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 6393 * 6394 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6395 */ 6396 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6397 6398 /** 6399 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 6400 * 6401 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 6402 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 6403 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 6404 * while associating, for instance. 6405 * 6406 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6407 */ 6408 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6409 6410 /** 6411 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 6412 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 6413 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 6414 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 6415 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 6416 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6417 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 6418 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6419 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 6420 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 6421 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 6422 * for instance. 6423 */ 6424 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 6425 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 6426 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 6427 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 6428 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 6429 }; 6430 6431 /** 6432 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 6433 * 6434 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6435 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 6436 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 6437 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6438 * 6439 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6440 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6441 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6442 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6443 */ 6444 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6445 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6446 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6447 void *data); 6448 6449 /** 6450 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 6451 * 6452 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6453 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6454 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 6455 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 6456 * be used. 6457 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6458 * 6459 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6460 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6461 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6462 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6463 */ 6464 static inline void 6465 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6466 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6467 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6468 void *data) 6469 { 6470 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 6471 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 6472 iterator, data); 6473 } 6474 6475 /** 6476 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 6477 * 6478 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6479 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6480 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6481 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 6482 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6483 * 6484 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6485 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6486 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6487 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6488 */ 6489 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6490 u32 iter_flags, 6491 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6492 u8 *mac, 6493 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6494 void *data); 6495 6496 struct ieee80211_vif * 6497 __ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6498 struct ieee80211_vif *prev, 6499 u32 iter_flags); 6500 6501 /** 6502 * for_each_interface - iterate interfaces under wiphy mutex 6503 * @vif: the iterator variable 6504 * @hw: the HW to iterate for 6505 * @flags: the iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6506 */ 6507 #define for_each_interface(vif, hw, flags) \ 6508 for (vif = __ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, NULL, flags); \ 6509 vif; \ 6510 vif = __ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, vif, flags)) 6511 6512 /** 6513 * for_each_active_interface - iterate active interfaces under wiphy mutex 6514 * @vif: the iterator variable 6515 * @hw: the HW to iterate for 6516 */ 6517 #define for_each_active_interface(vif, hw) \ 6518 for_each_interface(vif, hw, IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE) 6519 6520 /** 6521 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 6522 * 6523 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6524 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6525 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 6526 * 6527 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6528 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6529 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6530 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6531 */ 6532 static inline void 6533 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6534 u32 iter_flags, 6535 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6536 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6537 void *data) 6538 { 6539 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 6540 6541 for_each_interface(vif, hw, iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE) 6542 iterator(data, vif->addr, vif); 6543 } 6544 6545 /** 6546 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 6547 * 6548 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6549 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6550 * function for them. 6551 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6552 * 6553 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6554 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6555 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6556 */ 6557 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6558 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6559 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6560 void *data); 6561 6562 struct ieee80211_sta * 6563 __ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6564 struct ieee80211_sta *prev); 6565 6566 /** 6567 * for_each_station - iterate stations under wiphy mutex 6568 * @sta: the iterator variable 6569 * @hw: the HW to iterate for 6570 */ 6571 #define for_each_station(sta, hw) \ 6572 for (sta = __ieee80211_iterate_stations(hw, NULL); \ 6573 sta; \ 6574 sta = __ieee80211_iterate_stations(hw, sta)) 6575 6576 /** 6577 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx - iterate stations 6578 * 6579 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6580 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6581 * function for them. This version can only be used while holding the wiphy 6582 * mutex. 6583 * 6584 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6585 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6586 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6587 */ 6588 static inline void 6589 ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6590 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6591 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6592 void *data) 6593 { 6594 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 6595 6596 for_each_station(sta, hw) 6597 iterator(data, sta); 6598 } 6599 6600 /** 6601 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6602 * 6603 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 6604 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 6605 * 6606 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6607 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 6608 */ 6609 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 6610 6611 /** 6612 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6613 * 6614 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 6615 * workqueue. 6616 * 6617 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6618 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 6619 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 6620 */ 6621 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6622 struct delayed_work *dwork, 6623 unsigned long delay); 6624 6625 /** 6626 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer. 6627 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6628 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6629 * 6630 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer 6631 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the 6632 * mac80211. 6633 * 6634 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section. 6635 */ 6636 void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6637 u16 tid); 6638 6639 /** 6640 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 6641 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6642 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6643 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 6644 * 6645 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 6646 * 6647 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6648 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6649 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6650 */ 6651 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 6652 u16 timeout); 6653 6654 /** 6655 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 6656 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6657 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6658 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6659 * 6660 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6661 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 6662 * from any context. 6663 */ 6664 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6665 u16 tid); 6666 6667 /** 6668 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 6669 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 6670 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 6671 * 6672 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 6673 * 6674 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6675 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6676 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6677 */ 6678 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6679 6680 /** 6681 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6682 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6683 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6684 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6685 * 6686 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6687 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6688 * can be called from any context. 6689 */ 6690 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6691 u16 tid); 6692 6693 /** 6694 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6695 * 6696 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6697 * @addr: station's address 6698 * 6699 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6700 * 6701 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6702 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6703 */ 6704 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6705 const u8 *addr); 6706 6707 /** 6708 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6709 * 6710 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6711 * @addr: remote station's address 6712 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6713 * 6714 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6715 * 6716 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6717 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6718 * 6719 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6720 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6721 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6722 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6723 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6724 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6725 * is not reliable. 6726 * 6727 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6728 */ 6729 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6730 const u8 *addr, 6731 const u8 *localaddr); 6732 6733 /** 6734 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6735 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6736 * @addr: remote station's link address 6737 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6738 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6739 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6740 * 6741 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6742 * 6743 * Return: pointer to STA if found, otherwise %NULL. 6744 */ 6745 struct ieee80211_sta * 6746 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6747 const u8 *addr, 6748 const u8 *localaddr, 6749 unsigned int *link_id); 6750 6751 /** 6752 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6753 * @hw: the hardware 6754 * @pubsta: the station 6755 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6756 * 6757 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6758 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6759 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6760 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6761 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6762 * 6763 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6764 * manner. 6765 * 6766 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6767 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6768 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6769 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6770 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6771 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6772 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6773 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6774 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6775 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6776 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6777 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6778 * woke up while blocked or not. 6779 */ 6780 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6781 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6782 6783 /** 6784 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6785 * @pubsta: the station 6786 * 6787 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6788 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6789 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6790 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6791 * 6792 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6793 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6794 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6795 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6796 * 6797 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6798 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6799 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6800 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6801 */ 6802 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6803 6804 /** 6805 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6806 * @pubsta: the station 6807 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6808 * 6809 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6810 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6811 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6812 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6813 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6814 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6815 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6816 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6817 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6818 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6819 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6820 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6821 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6822 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6823 */ 6824 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6825 6826 /** 6827 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6828 * @pubsta: the station 6829 * 6830 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6831 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6832 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6833 * 6834 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6835 * there is no need to call this function. 6836 */ 6837 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6838 6839 /** 6840 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6841 * 6842 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6843 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6844 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6845 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6846 * 6847 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6848 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6849 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6850 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6851 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6852 * attempts. 6853 * 6854 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6855 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6856 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6857 * them to 0. 6858 * 6859 * @pubsta: the station 6860 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6861 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6862 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6863 */ 6864 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6865 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6866 6867 /** 6868 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6869 * 6870 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6871 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6872 * 6873 * Return: %true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6874 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return %false. 6875 */ 6876 bool 6877 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6878 6879 /** 6880 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6881 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6882 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6883 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6884 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6885 * 6886 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; can sleep. 6887 * 6888 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6889 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6890 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6891 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. 6892 * 6893 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6894 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6895 * set_key callback. 6896 */ 6897 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6898 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6899 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6900 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6901 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6902 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6903 void *data), 6904 void *iter_data); 6905 6906 /** 6907 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6908 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6909 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6910 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6911 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6912 * 6913 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6914 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6915 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6916 * in removal process will be skipped. 6917 * 6918 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6919 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6920 */ 6921 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6922 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6923 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6924 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6925 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6926 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6927 void *data), 6928 void *iter_data); 6929 6930 /** 6931 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6932 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6933 * @iter: iterator function 6934 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6935 * 6936 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6937 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6938 * places while calling into the driver. 6939 * 6940 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6941 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6942 * removed. 6943 * 6944 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6945 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6946 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6947 * or not. 6948 */ 6949 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6950 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6951 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6952 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6953 void *data), 6954 void *iter_data); 6955 6956 /** 6957 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_mtx - iterate channel contexts 6958 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6959 * @iter: iterator function 6960 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6961 * 6962 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function can only be used while 6963 * holding the wiphy mutex. 6964 * 6965 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6966 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6967 * removed. 6968 * 6969 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6970 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6971 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6972 * or not. 6973 */ 6974 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_mtx( 6975 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6976 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6977 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6978 void *data), 6979 void *iter_data); 6980 6981 /** 6982 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6983 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6984 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6985 * 6986 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6987 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6988 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6989 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6990 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6991 * %NULL. 6992 * 6993 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6994 */ 6995 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6996 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6997 6998 /** 6999 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 7000 * 7001 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7002 * 7003 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 7004 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 7005 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 7006 */ 7007 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7008 7009 /** 7010 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 7011 * 7012 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7013 * 7014 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 7015 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 7016 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 7017 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 7018 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 7019 * 7020 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 7021 * without connection recovery attempts. 7022 */ 7023 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7024 7025 /** 7026 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 7027 * 7028 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7029 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 7030 * 7031 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 7032 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 7033 */ 7034 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 7035 7036 /** 7037 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 7038 * 7039 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7040 * 7041 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 7042 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 7043 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 7044 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 7045 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 7046 * 7047 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 7048 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 7049 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 7050 * disconnect normally later. 7051 * 7052 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 7053 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 7054 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 7055 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 7056 */ 7057 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7058 7059 /** 7060 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 7061 * hardware restart 7062 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7063 * 7064 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 7065 * hardware restart. 7066 */ 7067 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7068 7069 /** 7070 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 7071 * rssi threshold triggered 7072 * 7073 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7074 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 7075 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 7076 * @gfp: context flags 7077 * 7078 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 7079 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 7080 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 7081 */ 7082 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7083 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 7084 s32 rssi_level, 7085 gfp_t gfp); 7086 7087 /** 7088 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 7089 * 7090 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7091 * @gfp: context flags 7092 */ 7093 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 7094 7095 /** 7096 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 7097 * 7098 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7099 * @chanctx_conf: Channel context on which radar is detected. Mandatory to 7100 * pass a valid pointer during MLO. For non-MLO %NULL can be passed 7101 */ 7102 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7103 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf); 7104 7105 /** 7106 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 7107 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7108 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 7109 * @link_id: the link_id on which the switch was done. Ignored if success is 7110 * false. 7111 * 7112 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 7113 * and wake up the suspended queues. 7114 */ 7115 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success, 7116 unsigned int link_id); 7117 7118 /** 7119 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 7120 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7121 * 7122 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 7123 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 7124 * a deauth frame in this case. 7125 */ 7126 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7127 7128 /** 7129 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 7130 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7131 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 7132 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 7133 * 7134 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 7135 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 7136 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 7137 */ 7138 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 7139 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 7140 7141 /** 7142 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 7143 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7144 */ 7145 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7146 7147 /** 7148 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 7149 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7150 */ 7151 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7152 7153 /** 7154 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 7155 * 7156 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 7157 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 7158 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 7159 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 7160 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 7161 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 7162 * 7163 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7164 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 7165 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 7166 */ 7167 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 7168 const u8 *addr); 7169 7170 /** 7171 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 7172 * @pubsta: station struct 7173 * @tid: the session's TID 7174 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 7175 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 7176 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 7177 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 7178 * 7179 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 7180 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 7181 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 7182 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 7183 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames) 7184 */ 7185 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 7186 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 7187 u16 received_mpdus); 7188 7189 /** 7190 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 7191 * 7192 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 7193 * buffer. 7194 * 7195 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7196 * @ra: the peer's destination address 7197 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 7198 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 7199 */ 7200 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 7201 7202 /** 7203 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 7204 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7205 * @addr: station mac address 7206 * @tid: the rx tid 7207 */ 7208 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 7209 unsigned int tid); 7210 7211 /** 7212 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 7213 * 7214 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 7215 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 7216 * reordering. 7217 * 7218 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 7219 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 7220 * 7221 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7222 * @addr: station mac address 7223 * @tid: the rx tid 7224 */ 7225 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7226 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 7227 { 7228 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 7229 return; 7230 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 7231 } 7232 7233 /** 7234 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 7235 * 7236 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 7237 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 7238 * reordering. 7239 * 7240 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 7241 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 7242 * 7243 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7244 * @addr: station mac address 7245 * @tid: the rx tid 7246 */ 7247 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7248 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 7249 { 7250 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 7251 return; 7252 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 7253 } 7254 7255 /** 7256 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 7257 * 7258 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 7259 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 7260 * 7261 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 7262 * 7263 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7264 * @addr: station mac address 7265 * @tid: the rx tid 7266 */ 7267 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7268 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 7269 7270 /* Rate control API */ 7271 7272 /** 7273 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 7274 * 7275 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 7276 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 7277 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 7278 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 7279 * to be filled in 7280 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 7281 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 7282 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 7283 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 7284 * RTS threshold 7285 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 7286 * if the selected rate supports it 7287 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 7288 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 7289 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 7290 */ 7291 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 7292 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 7293 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 7294 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 7295 struct sk_buff *skb; 7296 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 7297 bool rts, short_preamble; 7298 u32 rate_idx_mask; 7299 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 7300 bool bss; 7301 }; 7302 7303 /** 7304 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 7305 */ 7306 enum rate_control_capabilities { 7307 /** 7308 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 7309 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 7310 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 7311 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 7312 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 7313 */ 7314 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 7315 /** 7316 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 7317 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 7318 */ 7319 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 7320 }; 7321 7322 struct rate_control_ops { 7323 unsigned long capa; 7324 const char *name; 7325 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7326 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 7327 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 7328 void (*free)(void *priv); 7329 7330 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 7331 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7332 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7333 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 7334 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7335 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7336 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7337 u32 changed); 7338 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7339 void *priv_sta); 7340 7341 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 7342 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7343 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 7344 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7345 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7346 struct sk_buff *skb); 7347 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7348 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 7349 7350 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 7351 struct dentry *dir); 7352 7353 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 7354 }; 7355 7356 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7357 enum nl80211_band band, 7358 int index) 7359 { 7360 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 7361 } 7362 7363 static inline s8 7364 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7365 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7366 { 7367 int i; 7368 7369 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7370 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7371 return i; 7372 7373 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 7374 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7375 7376 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 7377 return 0; 7378 } 7379 7380 static inline 7381 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7382 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7383 { 7384 unsigned int i; 7385 7386 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7387 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7388 return true; 7389 return false; 7390 } 7391 7392 /** 7393 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 7394 * 7395 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 7396 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 7397 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 7398 * the most recent rate control module decision. 7399 * 7400 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7401 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 7402 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 7403 * 7404 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7405 */ 7406 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7407 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 7408 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 7409 7410 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7411 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7412 7413 static inline bool 7414 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7415 { 7416 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 7417 } 7418 7419 static inline bool 7420 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7421 { 7422 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7423 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7424 } 7425 7426 static inline bool 7427 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7428 { 7429 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7430 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7431 } 7432 7433 static inline bool 7434 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7435 { 7436 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 7437 } 7438 7439 static inline bool 7440 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7441 { 7442 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 7443 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 7444 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 7445 } 7446 7447 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7448 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 7449 { 7450 if (p2p) { 7451 switch (type) { 7452 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 7453 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 7454 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 7455 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 7456 default: 7457 break; 7458 } 7459 } 7460 return type; 7461 } 7462 7463 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7464 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7465 { 7466 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 7467 } 7468 7469 /** 7470 * ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif - return HE capabilities for sband/vif 7471 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7472 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7473 * 7474 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap, or %NULL is none found 7475 */ 7476 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap * 7477 ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7478 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7479 { 7480 return ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7481 } 7482 7483 /** 7484 * ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif - return HE 6 GHz capabilities 7485 * @sband: the sband to search for the STA on 7486 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7487 * 7488 * Return: the 6GHz capabilities 7489 */ 7490 static inline __le16 7491 ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7493 { 7494 return ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7495 } 7496 7497 /** 7498 * ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif - return EHT capabilities for sband/vif 7499 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7500 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7501 * 7502 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap, or %NULL is none found 7503 */ 7504 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap * 7505 ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7507 { 7508 return ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7509 } 7510 7511 /** 7512 * ieee80211_get_uhr_iftype_cap_vif - return UHR capabilities for sband/vif 7513 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7514 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7515 * 7516 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_uhr_cap, or %NULL is none found 7517 */ 7518 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_uhr_cap * 7519 ieee80211_get_uhr_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7520 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7521 { 7522 return ieee80211_get_uhr_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7523 } 7524 7525 /** 7526 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 7527 * 7528 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7529 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 7530 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 7531 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 7532 * 7533 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 7534 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 7535 * matching GroupId management frame. 7536 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 7537 */ 7538 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 7539 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 7540 7541 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7542 int rssi_min_thold, 7543 int rssi_max_thold); 7544 7545 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7546 7547 /** 7548 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 7549 * 7550 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7551 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO 7552 * 7553 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 7554 * 7555 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 7556 * applicable. 7557 */ 7558 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int link_id); 7559 7560 /** 7561 * ieee80211_calculate_rx_timestamp - calculate timestamp in frame 7562 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7563 * @status: RX status 7564 * @mpdu_len: total MPDU length (including FCS) 7565 * @mpdu_offset: offset into MPDU to calculate timestamp at 7566 * 7567 * This function calculates the RX timestamp at the given MPDU offset, taking 7568 * into account what the RX timestamp was. An offset of 0 will just normalize 7569 * the timestamp to TSF at beginning of MPDU reception. 7570 * 7571 * Returns: the calculated timestamp 7572 */ 7573 u64 ieee80211_calculate_rx_timestamp(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7574 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7575 unsigned int mpdu_len, 7576 unsigned int mpdu_offset); 7577 7578 /** 7579 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 7580 * @vif: virtual interface 7581 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 7582 * @gfp: allocation flags 7583 * 7584 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 7585 */ 7586 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7587 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 7588 gfp_t gfp); 7589 7590 /** 7591 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 7592 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7593 * @vif: virtual interface 7594 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 7595 * @band: the band to transmit on 7596 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 7597 * 7598 * Return: %true if the skb was prepared, %false otherwise. 7599 * On failure, the skb is freed by this function; callers must not 7600 * free it again. 7601 * 7602 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 7603 */ 7604 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7605 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 7606 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 7607 7608 /** 7609 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 7610 * of injected frames. 7611 * 7612 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 7613 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 7614 * of the skb before calling this function. 7615 * 7616 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 7617 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 7618 * 7619 * Return: %true if the radiotap header was parsed, %false otherwise 7620 */ 7621 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 7622 struct net_device *dev); 7623 7624 /** 7625 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 7626 * 7627 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 7628 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 7629 * 7630 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 7631 * 7632 * private: 7633 * 7634 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 7635 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 7636 */ 7637 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 7638 u32 next_tsf; 7639 bool has_next_tsf; 7640 7641 u8 absent; 7642 7643 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7644 struct { 7645 u32 start; 7646 u32 duration; 7647 u32 interval; 7648 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7649 }; 7650 7651 /** 7652 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 7653 * 7654 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 7655 * @data: NoA tracking data 7656 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7657 * 7658 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 7659 */ 7660 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 7661 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7662 7663 /** 7664 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 7665 * 7666 * @data: NoA tracking data 7667 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7668 */ 7669 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7670 7671 /** 7672 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 7673 * @vif: virtual interface 7674 * @peer: the peer's destination address 7675 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 7676 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 7677 * @gfp: allocation flags 7678 * 7679 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 7680 */ 7681 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 7682 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 7683 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 7684 7685 /** 7686 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 7687 * 7688 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 7689 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 7690 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 7691 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 7692 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 7693 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 7694 * 7695 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 7696 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 7697 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7698 * 7699 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 7700 * @tid: the TID to reserve 7701 * 7702 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 7703 */ 7704 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7705 7706 /** 7707 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 7708 * 7709 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 7710 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 7711 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 7712 * 7713 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 7714 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 7715 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7716 * 7717 * @sta: the station 7718 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 7719 */ 7720 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7721 7722 /** 7723 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7724 * 7725 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7726 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7727 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7728 * 7729 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7730 * 7731 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 7732 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 7733 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 7734 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 7735 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 7736 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 7737 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 7738 * 7739 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 7740 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 7741 */ 7742 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7743 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7744 7745 /** 7746 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7747 * (in process context) 7748 * 7749 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 7750 * (internally disables bottom halves). 7751 * 7752 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7753 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7754 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7755 * 7756 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7757 */ 7758 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7759 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7760 { 7761 struct sk_buff *skb; 7762 7763 local_bh_disable(); 7764 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 7765 local_bh_enable(); 7766 7767 return skb; 7768 } 7769 7770 /** 7771 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 7772 * 7773 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7774 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7775 * 7776 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 7777 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 7778 */ 7779 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7780 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7781 7782 /** 7783 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 7784 * 7785 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7786 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 7787 * 7788 * Return: the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 7789 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 7790 * driver has finished scheduling it. 7791 */ 7792 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7793 7794 /** 7795 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7796 * 7797 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7798 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7799 * 7800 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7801 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7802 */ 7803 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7804 7805 /* (deprecated) */ 7806 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7807 { 7808 } 7809 7810 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7811 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7812 7813 /** 7814 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7815 * 7816 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7817 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7818 * 7819 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7820 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7821 * 7822 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7823 * this TXQ internally. 7824 */ 7825 static inline void 7826 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7827 { 7828 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7829 } 7830 7831 /** 7832 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7833 * 7834 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7835 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7836 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7837 * 7838 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7839 * internally. 7840 */ 7841 static inline void 7842 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7843 bool force) 7844 { 7845 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7846 } 7847 7848 /** 7849 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7850 * 7851 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7852 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7853 * fairness accounting without using the scheduling order enforced by 7854 * next_txq(). 7855 * 7856 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7857 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7858 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7859 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7860 * again. 7861 * 7862 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7863 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7864 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7865 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7866 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7867 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7868 * 7869 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7870 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7871 * 7872 * Return: %true if transmission is allowed, %false otherwise 7873 */ 7874 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7875 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7876 7877 /** 7878 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7879 * 7880 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7881 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7882 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7883 * 7884 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7885 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7886 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7887 */ 7888 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7889 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7890 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7891 7892 /** 7893 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7894 * 7895 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7896 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7897 * 7898 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7899 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7900 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7901 * @gfp: allocation flags 7902 */ 7903 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7904 u8 inst_id, 7905 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7906 gfp_t gfp); 7907 7908 /** 7909 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7910 * 7911 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7912 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7913 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7914 * 7915 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7916 * @match: match event information 7917 * @gfp: allocation flags 7918 */ 7919 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7920 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7921 gfp_t gfp); 7922 7923 /** 7924 * ieee80211_nan_sched_update_done - notify that NAN schedule update is done 7925 * 7926 * This function is called by the driver to notify mac80211 that the NAN 7927 * schedule update has been applied. 7928 * Must be called with wiphy mutex held. May sleep. 7929 * 7930 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7931 */ 7932 void ieee80211_nan_sched_update_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7933 7934 /** 7935 * ieee80211_nan_cluster_joined - notify about NAN cluster join. 7936 * 7937 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN cluster join. 7938 * 7939 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7940 * @cluster_id: the cluster ID that was joined 7941 * @new_cluster: true if this is a new cluster 7942 * @gfp: allocation flags 7943 */ 7944 void ieee80211_nan_cluster_joined(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7945 const u8 *cluster_id, bool new_cluster, 7946 gfp_t gfp); 7947 7948 /** 7949 * ieee80211_nan_try_evacuate - try to evacuate a NAN channel 7950 * 7951 * This function tries to evacuate a NAN channel that is using the given 7952 * channel context, to free up channel context resources. 7953 * 7954 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7955 * @conf: the channel context configuration to try to evacuate. If %NULL, 7956 * the NAN channel that has the fewest slots scheduled will be evacuated. 7957 * 7958 * Return: %true if a channel was evacuated, %false otherwise 7959 */ 7960 bool ieee80211_nan_try_evacuate(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7961 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *conf); 7962 7963 /** 7964 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7965 * 7966 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7967 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7968 * 7969 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7970 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7971 * information. 7972 * @len: frame length in bytes 7973 * 7974 * Return: the airtime estimate 7975 */ 7976 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7977 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7978 int len); 7979 7980 /** 7981 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7982 * 7983 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7984 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7985 * 7986 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7987 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7988 * @len: frame length in bytes 7989 * 7990 * Return: the airtime estimate 7991 */ 7992 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7993 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 7994 int len); 7995 /** 7996 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 7997 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7998 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7999 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO. 8000 * 8001 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 8002 * 8003 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 8004 */ 8005 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8006 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8007 unsigned int link_id); 8008 8009 /** 8010 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 8011 * probe response template. 8012 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 8013 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 8014 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO. 8015 * 8016 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 8017 * 8018 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 8019 */ 8020 struct sk_buff * 8021 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8022 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8023 unsigned int link_id); 8024 8025 /** 8026 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 8027 * collision. 8028 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 8029 * 8030 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 8031 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 8032 * aware of. 8033 */ 8034 void 8035 ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8036 u64 color_bitmap, u8 link_id); 8037 8038 /** 8039 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 8040 * 8041 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 8042 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 8043 * 8044 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 8045 * 8046 * Return: %true if @skb is a data frame, %false otherwise 8047 */ 8048 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 8049 { 8050 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 8051 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 8052 8053 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 8054 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 8055 } 8056 8057 /** 8058 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 8059 * @vif: interface to set active links on 8060 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 8061 * 8062 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; may sleep; calls 8063 * back into the driver. 8064 * 8065 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 8066 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 8067 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 8068 * 8069 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 8070 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 8071 * a sequence of calls like 8072 * 8073 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 8074 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 8075 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 8076 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 8077 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 8078 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 8079 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 8080 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 8081 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 8082 * 8083 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 8084 */ 8085 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 8086 8087 /** 8088 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 8089 * @vif: interface to set active links on 8090 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 8091 * 8092 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 8093 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 8094 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 8095 * completed after it returns. 8096 */ 8097 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8098 u16 active_links); 8099 8100 /** 8101 * ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm - tear down a negotiated TTLM request 8102 * @vif: the interface on which the tear down request should be sent. 8103 * 8104 * This function can be used to tear down a previously accepted negotiated 8105 * TTLM request. 8106 */ 8107 void ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 8108 8109 /** 8110 * ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw - convert channel width to STA RX bandwidth 8111 * @width: the channel width value to convert 8112 * Return: the STA RX bandwidth value for the channel width 8113 */ 8114 static inline enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth 8115 ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw(enum nl80211_chan_width width) 8116 { 8117 switch (width) { 8118 default: 8119 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 8120 fallthrough; 8121 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT: 8122 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20: 8123 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20; 8124 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40: 8125 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40; 8126 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80: 8127 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80; 8128 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_160: 8129 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80P80: 8130 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160; 8131 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_320: 8132 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320; 8133 } 8134 } 8135 8136 /** 8137 * ieee80211_prepare_rx_omi_bw - prepare for sending BW RX OMI 8138 * @link_sta: the link STA the OMI is going to be sent to 8139 * @bw: the bandwidth requested 8140 * 8141 * When the driver decides to do RX OMI to change bandwidth with a STA 8142 * it calls this function to prepare, then sends the OMI, and finally 8143 * calls ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(). 8144 * 8145 * Note that the (link) STA rate control is updated accordingly as well, 8146 * but the chanctx might not be updated if there are other users. 8147 * If the intention is to reduce the listen bandwidth, the driver must 8148 * ensure there are no TDLS stations nor other uses of the chanctx. 8149 * 8150 * Also note that in order to sequence correctly, narrowing bandwidth 8151 * will only happen in ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(), whereas widening 8152 * again (e.g. going back to normal) will happen here. 8153 * 8154 * Note that we treat this symmetrically, so if the driver calls this 8155 * and tells the peer to only send with a lower bandwidth, we assume 8156 * that the driver also wants to only send at that lower bandwidth, to 8157 * allow narrowing of the chanctx request for this station/interface. 8158 * 8159 * Finally, the driver must ensure that if the function returned %true, 8160 * ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw() is also called, even for example in 8161 * case of HW restart. 8162 * 8163 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held, and will call back 8164 * into the driver, so ensure no driver locks are held. 8165 * 8166 * Return: %true if changes are going to be made, %false otherwise 8167 */ 8168 bool ieee80211_prepare_rx_omi_bw(struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 8169 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bw); 8170 8171 /** 8172 * ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw - finalize BW RX OMI update 8173 * @link_sta: the link STA the OMI was sent to 8174 * 8175 * See ieee80211_client_prepare_rx_omi_bw(). Context is the same here 8176 * as well. 8177 */ 8178 void ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta); 8179 8180 /* for older drivers - let's not document these ... */ 8181 int ieee80211_emulate_add_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8182 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 8183 void ieee80211_emulate_remove_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8184 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 8185 void ieee80211_emulate_change_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8186 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 8187 u32 changed); 8188 int ieee80211_emulate_switch_vif_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8189 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 8190 int n_vifs, 8191 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 8192 8193 /** 8194 * ieee80211_vif_nan_started - Return whether a NAN vif is started 8195 * @vif: the vif 8196 * Return: %true iff the vif is a NAN interface and NAN is started 8197 */ 8198 bool ieee80211_vif_nan_started(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 8199 8200 /** 8201 * ieee80211_encrypt_tx_skb - Encrypt the transmit skb 8202 * @skb: the skb 8203 * Return: 0 if success and non-zero on error 8204 */ 8205 int ieee80211_encrypt_tx_skb(struct sk_buff *skb); 8206 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 8207